E-Class Cabriolet Operator's Manual É2075847802{ËÍ 2075847802

Order no. 6515 3862 13 Part no. 207 584 78 02 Edition C 2016 E-Class Cabriolet Symbols (Y This symbol tells you where you can find Publication details Registered trademarks: page) more information about a topic. YY Internet R ® This symbol indicates a warning or an Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- instruction that is continued on the next tooth SIG Inc. page. Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi- R cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the following websites: RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks play multifunction display/multimedia dis- of DOLBY Laboratories. play. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg- ~ This symbol tells you that you can find http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) istered trademarks of Daimler AG. further information in the Digital Oper- RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John- ator's Manual. son Controls. Editorial office R ® ® iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks © of Apple Inc. Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or R ® otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with- Logic7 is a registered trademark of Harman out written permission from Daimler AG. International Industries. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Vehicle manufacturer RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. Daimler AG R HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq- Mercedesstraße 137 uity Digital Corporation. 70327 Stuttgart RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. Germany RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. X This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. X Several of these symbols in succession indicate an instruction with several steps. As at 01.04.2015 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Digital form via the Internet We urge you to read this Operator's Manual The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro- carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi- vides easy access to all information cle before driving. For your own safety and a regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys- longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and tem. It also provides helpful animations, warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them interesting background information and a could result in damage to the vehicle or personal wide array of search options. injury to you or others. Digital form as an App Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- can view all the information on your vehicle Benz Limited Warranty. and multimedia system via mobile Internet The equipment or product designation of your or download it independently of network vehicle may vary depending on: access. Available for smartphones or tab- lets. RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App differ from that shown in the descriptions and may not yet be available in your country. illustrations. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC The following are integral components of the Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. vehicle: A Daimler Company RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains infor- mative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the afore- mentioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multimedia system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 2075847802 É2075847802{ËÍ 2 Contents

Index ...... 3 Introduction ...... 24

Digital Operator's Manual ...... 22 At a glance ...... 32

Safety ...... 40

Opening and closing ...... 73

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 96

Lights and windshield wipers ...... 109

Climate control ...... 117

Driving and parking ...... 127

On-board computer and displays .... 189

Multimedia system ...... 234

Stowage and features ...... 240

Maintenance and care ...... 257

Breakdown assistance ...... 270

Wheels and tires ...... 285

Technical data ...... 310 Index 3

1, 2, 3 ... Additives (engine oil) ...... 315 Address book 12 V socket see also Digital Operator's Man- see Sockets ual ...... 234 360° camera Adjusting the volume Cleaning ...... 267 Audio 20 ...... 235 Display in the multimedia system .. 176 COMAND ...... 235 Function/notes ...... 174 Air bags Deployment ...... 53 A Display message ...... 209 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Front air bag (driver, front Display message ...... 203 passenger) ...... 46 Function/notes ...... 62 Head bag ...... 48 Important safety notes ...... 62 Important safety notes ...... 45 Warning lamp ...... 227 Introduction ...... 45 Accident Knee bag ...... 47 Automatic measures after an acci- Occupant Classification System dent ...... 56 (OCS) ...... 48 Activating media mode PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- General notes ...... 239 tor lamp ...... 41 Activating/deactivating cooling Pelvis air bag ...... 48 with air dehumidification ...... 121 Side impact air bag ...... 47 Active Blind Spot Assist Air vents Activating/deactivating (on- Glove box ...... 126 board computer) ...... 198 Important safety notes ...... 126 Display message ...... 215 Setting ...... 126 Function/information ...... 183 Setting the blower output of the Active Driving Assistance package .. 183 AIRSCARF vents ...... 126 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the side air vents ...... 126 Activating/deactivating (on- Switching AIRSCARF on/off ...... 102 board computer) ...... 198 Air-conditioning system Display message ...... 215 see Climate control Function/information ...... 186 AIRCAP Active Parking Assist Cleaning instructions ...... 265 Detecting parking spaces ...... 167 Extending/retracting ...... 92 Display message ...... 216 Important safety notes ...... 92 Exiting a parking space ...... 169 Installing/removing the wind Function/notes ...... 166 screen ...... 93 Important safety notes ...... 166 AIRSCARF Parking ...... 168 Switching on/off ...... 102 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 68 AIRSCARF vents Adaptive Brake Assist Setting the blower output ...... 126 Function/notes ...... 66 Alarm Adaptive Highbeam Assist ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 71 Display message ...... 211 Switching off (ATA) ...... 71 Function/notes ...... 111 Switching the function on/off Switching on/off ...... 112 (ATA) ...... 71 4 Index

Alarm system DIRECT SELECT lever ...... 134 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Display message ...... 220 Anti-lock braking system Drive program display ...... 134 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Driving tips ...... 136 Anti-Theft Alarm system Emergency running mode ...... 141 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging drive position ...... 135 Ashtray ...... 244 Engaging neutral ...... 135 Assistance display (on-board com- Engaging park position automati- puter) ...... 196 cally ...... 135 Assistance menu (on-board com- Engaging reverse gear ...... 135 puter) ...... 196 Engaging the park position ...... 134 ASSYST PLUS Kickdown ...... 137 Displaying a service message ...... 261 Manual drive program ...... 138 Hiding a service message ...... 261 Manual drive program (vehicles Resetting the service interval dis- with Sports package AMG) ...... 139 play ...... 261 Overview ...... 134 Service message ...... 260 Problem (malfunction) ...... 141 Special service requirements ...... 261 Program selector button ...... 137 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Pulling away ...... 130 Activating/deactivating ...... 71 Starting the engine ...... 130 Function ...... 71 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 138 Switching off the alarm ...... 71 Transmission position display ATTENTION ASSIST (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134 Activating/deactivating ...... 197 Transmission positions ...... 136 Display message ...... 214 Automatic transmission emer- Function/notes ...... 177 gency mode ...... 141 Audio 20 Switching on/off ...... 235 B Audio system Back button ...... 235 see separate operating instructions Bag hook Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ...... 242 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 62 see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Function/notes ...... 62 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist Display message ...... 211 (Brake Assist PLUS with Cross- see Lights Traffic Assist) Automatic car wash (care) ...... 262 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Important safety notes ...... 63 Battery (SmartKey) stop function) ...... 131 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Checking ...... 76 Important safety notes ...... 75 start/stop function) ...... 131 Replacing ...... 76 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 109 Battery (vehicle) Automatic transmission Charging ...... 276 Accelerator pedal position ...... 136 Display message ...... 213 Automatic drive program ...... 138 Important safety notes ...... 274 Changing gear ...... 136 Jump starting ...... 278 Index 5

Belt C see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist California Activating/deactivating (on- Important notice for retail cus- board computer) ...... 198 tomers and lessees ...... 25 Calling up a malfunction Display message ...... 215 Notes/function ...... 180 see Display messages Car see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® see Vehicle Care Connecting another mobile 360° camera ...... 267 phone ...... 239 AIRCAP ...... 265 Searching for a mobile phone ...... 238 Car wash ...... 262 see also Digital Operator's Man- Carpets ...... 269 ual ...... 234 Display ...... 268 Telephony ...... 237 Brake Assist Exhaust pipe ...... 267 Exterior lights ...... 266 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Gear or selector lever ...... 268 Interior ...... 268 Display message ...... 205 Matte finish ...... 264 Notes ...... 315 Brake force distribution Notes ...... 262 Paint ...... 263 see EBD (electronic brake force Plastic trim ...... 268 distribution) Brake lamps Power washer ...... 263 Rear view camera ...... 267 Display message ...... 211 Brakes Roof lining ...... 269 Seat belt ...... 269 ABS ...... 62 Seat cover ...... 268 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 66 Sensors ...... 267 BAS ...... 62 Soft top ...... 264 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Steering wheel ...... 268 Assist ...... 62 Trim pieces ...... 268 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 315 Washing by hand ...... 263 Display message ...... 203 Wheels ...... 265 HOLD function ...... 162 Wind deflector ...... 265 Important safety notes ...... 148 Wind screen ...... 265 Maintenance ...... 149 Windows ...... 266 Parking brake ...... 145 Wiper blades ...... 266 Riding tips ...... 148 Wooden trim ...... 268 Warning lamp ...... 226 Breakdown Cargo tie down rings ...... 242 CD Where will I find...? ...... 270 see Flat tire see also Digital Operator's Man- Brightness control (instrument ual ...... 234 CD player (on-board computer) cluster lighting) ...... 33 ...... 194 Bulbs Central locking see Replacing bulbs Automatic locking (on-board computer) ...... 200 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 73 6 Index

Changing bulbs Switching air-recirculation mode High-beam headlamps ...... 114 on/off ...... 125 Child Switching on/off ...... 120 Restraint system ...... 58 Switching residual hea t on/off ...... 125 Child seat Switching the rear window Forward-facing restraint system ...... 60 defroster on/off ...... 124 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Switching the ZONE function on/ anchors ...... 59 off ...... 123 On the front-passenger seat ...... 59 Cockpit Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60 Overview ...... 32 Child-proof locks see Instrument cluster Important safety notes ...... 60 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Children PLUS Special seat belt retractor ...... 57 Activating/deactivating ...... 197 Cigarette lighter ...... 245 Display message ...... 205 Cleaning Operation/notes ...... 64 Mirror turn signal ...... 266 COMAND Climate control Switching on/off ...... 235 Automatic climate control (3- COMAND display zone) ...... 119 Cleaning ...... 268 Controlling automatically ...... 121 Combination switch ...... 110 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 121 Connecting a USB device Defrosting the windows ...... 124 see also Digital Operator's Man- Defrosting the windshield ...... 123 ual ...... 234 Dual-zone automatic climate con- Consumption statistics (on-board trol ...... 118 computer) ...... 192 General notes ...... 117 Controller ...... 235 Indicator lamp ...... 121 Coolant (engine) Information about using auto- Checking the level ...... 259 matic climate control ...... 120 Display message ...... 212 Maximum cooling ...... 123 Filling capacity ...... 316 Overview of systems ...... 117 Important safety notes ...... 316 Problem with the rear window Temperature gauge ...... 189 defroster ...... 125 Warning lamp ...... 230 Problems with cooling with air Cooling dehumidification ...... 121 see Climate control Rear control panel ...... 119 Copyright ...... 31 Refrigerant ...... 317 Cornering light function Refrigerant filling capacity ...... 317 Display message ...... 211 Setting the air distribution ...... 122 Function/notes ...... 111 Setting the air vents ...... 126 Cruise control Setting the airflow ...... 123 Activation conditions ...... 151 Setting the climate mode ...... 122 Cruise control lever ...... 151 Setting the temperature ...... 122 Deactivating ...... 152 Setting the temperature with 3- Display message ...... 218 zone automatic climate control ..... 122 Driving system ...... 151 Setting the temperature with dual- Function/notes ...... 151 zone automatic climate control ..... 122 Important safety notes ...... 151 Index 7

Setting a speed ...... 152 Vehicle ...... 220 Storing and maintaining current Distance recorder ...... 191 speed ...... 151 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 232 Cup holder Distance warning function Center console ...... 243 Function/notes ...... 65 Important safety notes ...... 243 DISTRONIC PLUS Rear compartment ...... 244 Activating ...... 155 Customer Assistance Center Activation conditions ...... 155 (CAC) ...... 28 Deactivating ...... 158 Customer Relations Department ...... 28 Display message ...... 216 Displays in the multifunction dis- D play ...... 158 Function/notes ...... 153 Dashboard Important safety notes ...... 153 see Instrument cluster Setting the specified minimum Data distance ...... 157 see Technical data Stopping ...... 156 Data carrier Doors Selecting ...... 194 Automatic locking (on-board com- Daytime running lamps puter) ...... 200 Display message ...... 211 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 79 Function/notes ...... 109 Central locking/unlocking Switching on/off (on-board com- (SmartKey) ...... 73 puter) ...... 199 Control panel ...... 39 Declarations of conformity ...... 27 Display message ...... 222 Delayed switch-off Emergency locking ...... 80 Exterior lighting (on-board com- Emergency unlocking ...... 80 puter) ...... 199 Important safety notes ...... 78 Interior lighting ...... 200 Opening (from inside) ...... 78 Diagnostics connection ...... 28 Drinking and driving ...... 147 Digital Operator's Manual Drive program Help ...... 22 Automatic ...... 138 Introduction ...... 22 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134 Digital speedometer ...... 192 Manual ...... 138 DIRECT SELECT lever Manual (vehicles with Sports Automatic transmission ...... 134 package AMG) ...... 139 Display messages Driver's door ASSYST PLUS ...... 260 see Doors Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 202 Driving abroad Driving systems ...... 214 Mercedes-Benz Service ...... 261 Engine ...... 212 Driving on flooded roads ...... 150 General notes ...... 202 Driving safety systems Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 202 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 62 KEYLESS-GO ...... 224 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 68 Lights ...... 211 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 66 Safety systems ...... 203 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 62 SmartKey ...... 223 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Tires ...... 219 Assist ...... 62 8 Index

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Limited braking efficiency on sal- PLUS ...... 64 ted roads ...... 149 Distance warning function ...... 65 Snow chains ...... 287 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Wet road surface ...... 148 bution) ...... 68 DVD video ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Operating (on-board computer) ..... 194 gram) ...... 66 see also Digital Operator's Man- Important safety information ...... 61 ual ...... 234 Overview ...... 61 Dynamic handling package with PRE-SAFE® Brake ...... 69 sports mode ...... 163 STEER CONTROL ...... 71 Driving systems E 360°camera ...... 174 E10 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 183 see Fuel Active Driving Assistance pack- EASY-ENTRY feature age ...... 183 Activating/deactivating ...... 200 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 186 Function/notes ...... 104 Active Parking Assist ...... 166 EASY-EXIT feature ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 177 Crash-responsive ...... 105 Blind Spot Assist ...... 180 Function/notes ...... 104 Cruise control ...... 151 Switching on/off ...... 200 Display message ...... 214 EBD (electronic brake force distri- DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 153 bution) DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Display message ...... 204 Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ...... 160 Function/notes ...... 68 Dynamic handling package with ECO display sports mode ...... 163 Function/notes ...... 147 HOLD function ...... 162 On-board computer ...... 192 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 182 ECO start/stop function Lane Tracking package ...... 180 Automatic engine start ...... 131 PARKTRONIC ...... 163 Automatic engine switch-off ...... 131 Rear view camera ...... 170 Deactivating/activating ...... 132 Traffic Sign Assist ...... 179 General information ...... 131 Driving tips Important safety notes ...... 131 Automatic transmission ...... 136 Introduction ...... 131 Brakes ...... 148 Electronic Stability Program Break-in period ...... 127 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Downhill gradient ...... 148 Emergency Drinking and driving ...... 147 Automatic measures after an acci- Driving in winter ...... 150 dent ...... 56 Driving on flooded roads ...... 150 Emergency closing Driving on wet roads ...... 149 Soft top ...... 87 Exhaust check ...... 147 Emergency release Fuel ...... 146 Driver's door ...... 80 General ...... 146 Trunk ...... 82 Hydroplaning ...... 149 Vehicle ...... 80 Icy road surfaces ...... 150 Index 9

Emergency spare wheel General notes ...... 66 General notes ...... 308 Important safety information ...... 67 Important safety notes ...... 308 Trailer stabilization ...... 68 Removing ...... 309 Warning lamp ...... 227 Storage location ...... 309 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- Stowing ...... 309 tem) ...... 67 Technical data ...... 308 Exhaust check ...... 147 Emergency Tensioning Devices Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Activation ...... 53 tions) ...... 267 Emissions control Exterior lighting Service and warranty information .... 25 Setting options ...... 109 Engine see Lights Check Engine warning lamp ...... 230 Exterior mirrors Display message ...... 212 Adjusting ...... 105 ECO start/stop function ...... 131 Dipping (automatic) ...... 106 Engine number ...... 312 Folding in when locking (on-board Irregular running ...... 133 computer) ...... 201 Jump-starting ...... 278 Folding in/out (automatically) ...... 106 Starting problems ...... 133 Folding in/out (electrically) ...... 106 Starting the engine with the Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106 SmartKey ...... 130 Setting ...... 106 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ...... 130 Storing settings (memory func- Switching off ...... 145 tion) ...... 108 Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 282 Storing the parking position ...... 107 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ...... 133 F Engine jump starting see Jump starting (engine) Favorites Engine oil Overview ...... 236 Adding ...... 259 Filler cap Additives ...... 315 see Refueling Checking the oil level ...... 258 Flat tire Checking the oil level using the MOExtended tires ...... 270 dipstick ...... 258 Preparing the vehicle ...... 270 Display message ...... 213 TIREFIT kit ...... 271 Filling capacity ...... 315 see Emergency spare wheel Notes about oil grades ...... 315 Floormats ...... 255 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 258 Frequencies Entering an address Mobile phone ...... 310 see also Digital Operator's Man- Two-way radio ...... 310 ual ...... 234 Fuel ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- Consumption statistics ...... 192 gram) Displaying the current consump- Characteristics ...... 67 tion ...... 192 Deactivating/activating ...... 196 Displaying the range ...... 192 Deactivating/activating (notes) ...... 67 Driving tips ...... 146 Display message ...... 203 Flexible fuel vehicles ...... 314 Function/notes ...... 66 Fuel gauge ...... 33 10 Index

Grade (gasoline) ...... 313 Head bags Important safety notes ...... 313 Display message ...... 208 Problem (malfunction) ...... 144 Operation ...... 48 Refueling ...... 141 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ...... 102 Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 313 Head restraint Fuel filler flap Lowering manually (rear) ...... 98 Opening ...... 142 Head restraints Fuel level Adjusting ...... 98 Calling up the range (on-board Adjusting (electrically) ...... 98 computer) ...... 192 Adjusting (rear) ...... 98 Fuel tank see NECK-PRO head restraints Capacity ...... 313 Headlamps Problem (malfunction) ...... 144 Fogging up ...... 112 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool see Automatic headlamp mode kit) ...... 270 Heating Fuses see Climate control Allocation chart ...... 283 High beam flasher ...... 110 Before changing ...... 283 High-beam headlamps Dashboard fuse box ...... 283 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...... 111 Fuse box in the engine compart- Changing bulbs ...... 114 ment ...... 283 Display message ...... 211 Fuse box in the trunk ...... 284 Switching on/off ...... 110 Important safety notes ...... 282 Hill start assist ...... 130 HOLD function G Activating ...... 162 Garage door opener Deactivating ...... 162 Display message ...... 214 Clearing the memory ...... 255 Function/notes ...... 162 General notes ...... 252 Home address Important safety notes ...... 253 see also Digital Operator's Man- Opening/closing the garage door .. 255 ual ...... 234 Problems when programming ...... 255 Hood Programming (button in the rear- Closing ...... 258 view mirror) ...... 253 Display message ...... 222 Synchronizing the rolling code ...... 254 Important safety notes ...... 257 Gasoline ...... 313 Opening ...... 257 Genuine parts ...... 24 Horn ...... 32 Glove box ...... 241 Hydroplaning ...... 149 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Man- I ual ...... 234 Ignition lock H see Key positions Immobilizer Handbrake ...... 71 Indicator and warning lamps see Parking brake COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST Hazard warning lamps ...... 111 PLUS ...... 232 Index 11

Indicator lamps L see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators Lamps see Turn signals see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Lane Keeping Assist Overview ...... 33 Activating/deactivating ...... 198 Settings ...... 198 Display message ...... 215 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 33 Function/information ...... 182 Instrument cluster lighting ...... 199 Lane Tracking package ...... 180 Interior lighting LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Automatic control ...... 113 anchors ...... 59 Delayed switch-off (on-board License plate lamp (display mes- computer) ...... 200 sage) ...... 211 Overview ...... 113 Light function, active Reading lamp ...... 113 Display message ...... 211 Setting the brightness of the dis- Light sensor (display message) ...... 211 play/switch (on-board computer) .. 199 Lights iPod® Activating/deactivating the inte- see also Digital Operator's Man- rior lighting delayed switch-off ...... 200 ual ...... 234 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...... 111 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 109 J Cornering light function ...... 111 Hazard warning lamps ...... 111 Jack High beam flasher ...... 110 Storage location ...... 270 High-beam headlamps ...... 110 Using ...... 305 Light switch ...... 109 Jump starting (engine) ...... 278 Low-beam headlamps ...... 110 Parking lamps ...... 110 K Rear fog lamp ...... 110 Key positions Setting the brightness of the display/switch (on-board computer) .. 199 KEYLESS-GO ...... 128 Standing lamps ...... 110 SmartKey ...... 128 KEYLESS-GO Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board com- Deactivation ...... 73 puter) ...... 199 Display message ...... 224 Switching the exterior lighting Locking ...... 73 delayed switch-off on/off (on- Removing the Start/Stop button ... 129 board computer) ...... 199 Start/Stop button ...... 128 Switching the surround lighting Starting the engine ...... 130 on/off (on-board computer) ...... 199 Unlocking ...... 73 Kickdown Turn signals ...... 110 see Interior lighting Driving tips ...... 137 see Replacing bulbs Manual drive program ...... 140 Loading guidelines ...... 240 Knee bag ...... 47 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ...... 79 12 Index

Emergency locking ...... 80 Removing ...... 75 From inside (central locking but- Unlocking the driver's door ...... 80 ton) ...... 79 Media Interface Locking centrally USB port in the armrest of the see Central locking center console ...... 241 Locking verification signal (on- see Separate operating instructions board computer) ...... 200 Memory card (audio) ...... 194 Low-beam headlamps Memory function ...... 108 Display message ...... 211 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Switching on/off ...... 110 360°camera ...... 174 Luggage cover Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 183 see Trunk partition Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 186 Lumbar support Active Parking Assist ...... 166 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 177 port ...... 100 Blind Spot Assist ...... 180 Cruise control ...... 151 M DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 153 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering M+S tires ...... 287 Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ...... 160 Malfunction message General notes ...... 150 see Display messages Lane Keeping Assist ...... 182 Matte finish (cleaning instruc- PARKTRONIC ...... 163 tions) ...... 264 ® mbrace PRE-SAFE (anticipato ry occupant protection) ...... 55 Call priority ...... 249 ® Display message ...... 205 PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Downloading destinations occupant protection PLUS) ...... 56 (COMAND) ...... 249 Rear view camera ...... 170 Downloading routes ...... 252 Traffic Sign Assist ...... 179 Message memory (on-board com- Emergency call ...... 247 puter) General notes ...... 246 ...... 202 Messages Geo fencing ...... 252 Locating a stolen vehicle ...... 251 see Display messages Mirrors MB info call button ...... 248 Remote fault diagnosis ...... 251 see Exterior mirrors Remote vehicle locking ...... 251 see Rear-view mirror Roadside Assistance button ...... 248 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Search & Send ...... 250 ® Self-test ...... 246 Connecting (Bluetooth inter- Speed alert ...... 252 face) ...... 237 System ...... 246 Connecting another mobile Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 252 phone ...... 239 Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 250 Frequencies ...... 310 Mechanical key Installation ...... 310 Function/notes ...... 75 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 195 General notes ...... 75 Transmission output (maximum) .... 310 Inserting ...... 75 Modifying the programming Locking vehicle ...... 80 (SmartKey) ...... 74 Index 13

MOExtended tires ...... 270 Occupant safety Mounting wheels Air bags ...... 45 Lowering the vehicle ...... 307 Automatic measures after an acci- Mounting a new wheel ...... 306 dent ...... 56 Preparing the vehicle ...... 304 Children in the vehicle ...... 57 Raising the vehicle ...... 305 Important safety notes ...... 40 Removing a wheel ...... 306 Introduction to the restraint sys- Securing the vehicle against roll- tem ...... 40 ing away ...... 304 Occupant Classification System MP3 (OCS) ...... 48 Operation ...... 194 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator see also Digital Operator's Man- lamps ...... 41 ual ...... 234 Pets in the vehicle ...... 61 Multicontour seat PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu- Adjusting (on the seat) ...... 100 pant protection) ...... 55 Multifunction display PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Function/notes ...... 191 occupant protection PLUS) ...... 56 Permanent display ...... 198 Restraint system warning lamp ...... 40 Multifunction steering wheel OCS Operating the on-board computer .. 190 Conditions ...... 49 Overview ...... 34 Faults ...... 52 Multimedia system Operation ...... 49 see Separate operating instructions System self-test ...... 51 Music files Odometer ...... 191 see also Digital Operator's Man- Oil ual ...... 234 see Engine oil On-board computer N Assistance menu ...... 196 Navigation Audio menu ...... 194 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 193 Convenience submenu ...... 200 see also Digital Operator's Man- Display messages ...... 202 ual ...... 234 Displaying a service message ...... 261 NECK-PRO head restraints DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 158 Important safety notes ...... 54 Factory settings submenu ...... 201 Operation ...... 55 Important safety notes ...... 189 Resetting triggered ...... 55 Instrument cluster submenu ...... 198 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Lighting submenu ...... 199 cle ...... 127 Menu overview ...... 191 Message memory ...... 202 O Navigation menu ...... 193 Operation ...... 190 Occupant Classification System Service menu ...... 198 (OCS) Settings menu ...... 198 Conditions ...... 49 Standard display ...... 191 Faults ...... 52 Telephone menu ...... 195 Operation ...... 49 Trip menu ...... 191 System self-test ...... 51 Vehicle submenu ...... 200 14 Index

Video DVD operation ...... 194 PASSENGER AIR BAG Operating safety Display message ...... 209 Declaration of conformity ...... 27 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Important safety notes ...... 27 Indicator lamp ...... 41 Operating system Problems (malfunctions) ...... 209 see On-board computer Pets in the vehicle ...... 61 Operation Phone book Digital Operator's Manual ...... 22 see also Digital Operator's Man- Operator's Manual ual ...... 234 Vehicle equipment ...... 25 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Outside temperature display ...... 189 tions) ...... 268 Overhead control panel ...... 38 Power washers ...... 263 Override feature Power windows Rear side windows ...... 61 see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant P protection) Paint code number ...... 311 Display message ...... 205 Operation ...... 55 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 263 PRE-SAFE® Brake Panic alarm ...... 40 Parking Activating/deactivating ...... 197 Display message ...... 206 Important safety notes ...... 144 Function/notes ...... 69 Parking brake ...... 145 Important safety notes ...... 69 Position of exterior mirror, front- Warning lamp ...... 232 passenger side ...... 107 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory Rear view camera ...... 170 occupant protection PLUS) see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Display message ...... 206 Active Parking Assist ...... 166 Operation ...... 56 see Exterior mirrors Program selector button ...... 137 see PARKTRONIC Protection against theft Parking assistance ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 71 see PARKTRONIC Immobilizer ...... 71 Parking brake Protection of the environment Display message ...... 204 General notes ...... 24 Notes/function ...... 145 Pulling away Warning lamp ...... 226 Automatic transmission ...... 130 Parking lamps General notes ...... 130 Switching on/off ...... 110 PARKTRONIC Q Deactivating/activating ...... 165 QR code Driving system ...... 163 Mercedes-Benz Guide App ...... 1 Function/notes ...... 163 Rescue card ...... 29 Important safety notes ...... 163 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 28 Problem (malfunction) ...... 166 Range of the sensors ...... 164 Warning display ...... 165 Index 15

R Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Radio Reserve fuel Selecting a station ...... 194 Display message ...... 213 see separate operating instructions Warning lamp ...... 230 Radio mode see Fuel see also Digital Operator's Man- Residual heat (climate control) ...... 125 ual ...... 234 Restraint system Radio-wave reception/transmis- Display message ...... 207 sion in the vehicle Introduction ...... 40 Declaration of conformity ...... 27 Problem (malfunction) ...... 229 Reading lamp ...... 113 Warning lamp (function) ...... 40 Rear compartment Reversing feature Setting the temperature ...... 122 Side windows ...... 82 Rear fog lamp Reversing lamps (display mes- Display message ...... 211 sage) ...... 211 Switching on/off ...... 110 Roadside As sistance (breakdown) .... 26 Rear seats Roll bar Display message ...... 222 Display message ...... 207 Rear view camera Operation ...... 52 Cleaning instructions ...... 267 Roof Display in the multimedia system .. 171 Overview ...... 85 Function/notes ...... 170 see Soft top Switching on/off ...... 171 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Rear window defroster guidelines) ...... 269 Problem (malfunction) ...... 125 Roof load (maximum) ...... 317 Switching on/off ...... 124 Route guidance Rear-view mirror see also Digital Operator's Man- Anti-glare (manual) ...... 105 ual ...... 234 Dipping (automatic) ...... 106 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) S Important safety notes ...... 317 Safety Refueling Children in the vehicle ...... 57 Fuel gauge ...... 33 see Occupant safety Important safety notes ...... 141 Safety system Refueling process ...... 142 see Driving safety systems see Fuel SD memory card Remote control Ejecting ...... 239 Garage door opener ...... 252 Inserting ...... 239 Programming (garage door Inserting/removing ...... 239 opener) ...... 253 see also Digital Operator's Man- Replacing bulbs ual ...... 234 Important safety notes ...... 113 Selecting ...... 194 Overview of bulb types ...... 114 Search & Send Reporting safety defects ...... 28 see also Digital Operator's Man- Rescue card ...... 29 ual ...... 234 16 Index

Seat belts Engine oil ...... 315 Adjusting the driver's and front- Fuel ...... 313 passenger seat belt ...... 45 Important safety notes ...... 312 Automatic comfort-fit feature ...... 44 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Cleaning ...... 269 tem) ...... 317 Correct usage ...... 43 Washer fluid ...... 316 Fastening ...... 43 Setting the air distribution ...... 122 Important safety guidelines ...... 42 Setting the airflow ...... 123 Introduction ...... 41 Setting the date/time format Releasing ...... 44 see also Digital Operator's Man- Switching belt adjustment on/off ual ...... 234 (on-board computer) ...... 201 Setting the language Warning lamp ...... 225 see also Digital Operator's Man- Warning lamp (function) ...... 45 ual ...... 234 Seats Setting the time Adjusting (electrically) ...... 97 see also Digital Operator's Man- Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- ual ...... 234 port ...... 100 Settings Adjusting the head restraint ...... 98 Factory (on-board computer) ...... 201 Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 100 On-board computer ...... 198 Cleaning the cover ...... 268 Side impact air bag ...... 47 Correct driver's seat position ...... 96 Side marker lamp (display mes- Folding the backrests forward/ sage) ...... 211 back ...... 99 Side windows Important safety notes ...... 96 Cleaning ...... 266 Overview ...... 96 Important safety information ...... 82 Seat backrest display message ..... 222 Opening/closing ...... 83 Seat heating ...... 100 Opening/closing (all) ...... 83 Seat heating problem ...... 102 Problem (malfunction) ...... 85 Storing settings (memory func- Resetting ...... 84 tion) ...... 108 Reversing feature ...... 82 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ...... 102 SIRIUS services Switching seat heating on/off ...... 100 see also Digital Operator's Man- Switching seat ventilation on/ ual ...... 234 off ...... 101 SmartKey Section Changing the battery ...... 76 Trunk ...... 80 Changing the programming ...... 74 Securing cargo ...... 242 Checking the battery ...... 76 Selector lever Display message ...... 223 Cleaning ...... 268 Door central locking/unlocking ...... 73 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 267 Important safety notes ...... 73 Service menu (on-board com- Loss ...... 77 puter) ...... 198 Mechanical key ...... 75 Service message Opening/closing soft top ...... 87 see ASSYST PLUS Overview ...... 73 Service products Positions (ignition lock) ...... 128 Brake fluid ...... 315 Problem (malfunction) ...... 77 Coolant (engine) ...... 316 Starting the engine ...... 130 Index 17

SMS Steering assistant STEER CON- see also Digital Operator's Man- TROL ual ...... 234 see STEER CONTROL Snow chains ...... 287 Steering wheel Sockets Adjusting (electrically) ...... 103 General notes ...... 245 Button overview ...... 34 Rear compartment ...... 246 Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 190 Soft top Cleaning ...... 268 AIRCAP ...... 92 Important safety notes ...... 102 Cleaning ...... 264 Paddle shifters ...... 138 Closing manually in an emer- Steering wheel heating ...... 103 gency ...... 87 Storing settings (memory func- Display message ...... 223 tion) ...... 108 Important safety notes ...... 85 Steering wheel heating Installing/removing the AIRCAP Problem (malfunction) ...... 104 wind screen ...... 93 Switching on/off ...... 103 Opening/closing (SmartKey) ...... 87 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 138 Opening/closing (with soft-top Stowage areas ...... 240 switch) ...... 86 Stowage compartments Problem (malfunction) ...... 95 Armrest (under) ...... 241 Relocking ...... 91 Center console ...... 241 wind screen ...... 91 Cup holders ...... 243 Soft-top switch ...... 86 Glove box ...... 241 Sound Important safety information ...... 240 Switching on/off ...... 235 Stowage net ...... 242 Special seat belt retractor ...... 57 Under driver's seat/front- Specialist workshop ...... 28 passenger seat ...... 241 Speed, controlling Stowage net ...... 242 see Cruise control Stowage well beneath the trunk Speedometer floor ...... 243 Digital ...... 192 Summer tires ...... 287 In the Instrument cluster ...... 33 Sun visor ...... 244 Segments ...... 189 Surround lighting (on-board com- Selecting the display unit ...... 198 puter) ...... 199 Standing lamps Switching air-recirculation mode Display message ...... 211 on/off ...... 125 Switching on/off ...... 110 Switching on media mode Start/stop function Via the device list ...... 239 see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ...... 129 T STEER CONTROL ...... 71 Steering Tachometer ...... 189 Display message ...... 222 Tail lamps Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Display message ...... 211 (DISTRONIC PLUS) Tank Activating/deactivating ...... 197 see Fuel tank Display message ...... 218 Tank content Fuel gauge ...... 33 18 Index

Technical data Tire pressure not reached ...... 273 Capacities ...... 312 Tire pressure reached ...... 273 Emergency spare wheel ...... 308 Tires Information ...... 310 Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 302 Tires/wheels ...... 307 Average weight of the vehicle Vehicle data ...... 317 occupants (definition) ...... 301 Telephone Bar (definition) ...... 301 Accepting a call (multifunction Changing a wheel ...... 303 steering wheel) ...... 195 Characteristics ...... 301 Authorizing a mobile phone (con- Checking ...... 285 necting) ...... 238 Curb weight (definition) ...... 302 Connecting a mobile phone (gen- Definition of terms ...... 301 eral information) ...... 237 Direction of rotation ...... 304 Display message ...... 222 Display message ...... 219 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 195 Distribution of the vehicle occu- Number from the phone book ...... 195 pants (definition) ...... 303 Redialing ...... 196 DOT (Department of Transporta- Rejecting/ending a call ...... 195 tion) (definition) ...... 301 see also Digital Operator's Man- DOT, Tire Identification Number ual ...... 234 (TIN) ...... 301 Switching between mobile GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) phones ...... 239 (definition) ...... 302 Temperature GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Coolant ...... 189 inition) ...... 302 Outside temperature ...... 189 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Setting (climate control) ...... 122 ing) (definition) ...... 302 Through-loading feature ...... 242 Important safety notes ...... 285 Tire pressure Increased vehicle weight due to Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 291 optional equipment (definition) ...... 302 Checking manually ...... 291 Information on driving ...... 285 Display message ...... 219 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 302 Maximum ...... 291 Labeling (overview) ...... 298 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 273 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 303 Notes ...... 290 Load index ...... 300 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 273 Load index (definition) ...... 302 Recommended ...... 288 Maximum load on a tire (defini- Tire pressure monitor tion) ...... 302 Checking the tire pressure elec- Maximum loaded vehicle weight tronically ...... 293 (definition) ...... 302 Function/notes ...... 291 Maximum permissible tire pres- General notes ...... 291 sure (definition) ...... 302 Important safety notes ...... 292 Maximum tire load ...... 300 Restarting ...... 293 Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 302 Warning lamp ...... 233 MOExtended tires ...... 287 Warning message ...... 293 Optional equipment weight (defi- Tire-change tool kit ...... 270 nition) ...... 303 TIREFIT kit ...... 271 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- Important safety notes ...... 271 inition) ...... 302 Index 19

Replacing ...... 303 Traffic Sign Assist Service life ...... 286 Display message ...... 214 Sidewall (definition) ...... 303 Function/notes ...... 179 Speed rating (definition) ...... 302 Important safety notes ...... 179 Storing ...... 304 Instrument cluster display ...... 179 Structure and characteristics Transfer case ...... 141 (definition) ...... 301 Transmission Temperature ...... 298 see Automatic transmission TIN (Tire Identification Number) Transmission position display ...... 134 (definition) ...... 303 Transmission position display Tire bead (definition) ...... 303 (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134 Tire pressure (definition) ...... 303 Transporting the vehicle ...... 282 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 302 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Tire size (data) ...... 307 tions) ...... 268 Tire size designation, load-bearing Trip computer (on-board com- capacity, speed rating ...... 298 puter) ...... 192 Tire tread ...... 286 Trip odometer Tire tread (definition) ...... 303 Calling up ...... 191 Total load limit (definition) ...... 303 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 192 Traction ...... 297 Trunk Traction (definition) ...... 303 Emergency release ...... 81 Tread wear ...... 297 Important safety notes ...... 80 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Locking separately ...... 81 Standards ...... 297 Opening (automatically from Uniform Tire Quality Grading inside) ...... 81 Standards (definition) ...... 301 Opening/closing (manually from Wear indicator (definition) ...... 303 outside) ...... 80 Wheel and tire combination ...... 307 Trunk lid Wheel rim (definition) ...... 302 Display message ...... 222 see Flat tire Opening dimensions ...... 317 Tow-starting Trunk load (maximum) ...... 317 Emergency engine starting ...... 282 Trunk partition Important safety notes ...... 280 Display message ...... 222 Towing a trailer General notes ...... 91 ® ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- Opening/closing ...... 91 gram) ...... 68 Turn signals Towing away Display message ...... 211 Important safety guidelines ...... 280 Switching on/off ...... 110 Installing the towing eye ...... 281 Two-way radio Removing the towing eye ...... 281 Frequencies ...... 310 Transporting the vehicle ...... 282 Installation ...... 310 With both axles on the ground ...... 281 Transmission output (maximum) .... 310 With the rear axle raised ...... 282 Type identification plate Towing eye ...... 270 see Vehicle identification plate Traffic reports see al so Digital Operator's Man- ual ...... 234 20 Index

U Type plate ...... 311 Voice Control System Unlocking see Separate operating instructions Emergency unlocking ...... 80 From inside the vehicle (central W unlocking button) ...... 79 USB devices Warning and indicator lamps Connecting to the Media Inter- ABS ...... 227 face ...... 239 Brakes ...... 226 Check Engine ...... 230 V Coolant ...... 230 Distance warning ...... 232 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 244 ESP® ...... 227 Vehicle ESP® OFF ...... 228 Correct use ...... 28 Fuel tank ...... 230 Data acquisition ...... 29 General notes ...... 224 Display message ...... 220 Overview ...... 33 Equipment ...... 25 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ...... 41 Individual settings ...... 198 Reserve fuel ...... 230 Limited Warranty ...... 29 Restraint system ...... 229 Loading ...... 294 Seat belt ...... 225 Locking (in an emergency) ...... 80 Tire pressure monitor ...... 233 Locking (SmartKey) ...... 73 Warranty ...... 25 Lowering ...... 307 Washer fluid Maintenance ...... 26 Display message ...... 223 Parking for a long period ...... 146 Wheel and tire combinations Pulling away ...... 130 Tires ...... 307 Raising ...... 305 Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 307 Reporting problems ...... 28 Wheel chock Securing from rolling away ...... 304 ...... 304 Wheels Towing away ...... 280 Transporting ...... 282 Changing a wheel ...... 303 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 80 Checking ...... 285 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 73 Cleaning ...... 265 Vehicle data ...... 317 Emergency spare wheel ...... 308 Vehicle data ...... 317 Important safety notes ...... 285 Vehicle dimensions ...... 317 Information on driving ...... 285 Interchanging/changing ...... 303 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 80 Vehicle identification number Mounting a new wheel ...... 306 Mounting a wheel ...... 304 see VIN Removing a wheel ...... 306 Vehicle identification plate ...... 311 Storing ...... 304 Vehicle tool kit ...... 270 Tightening torque ...... 307 Video Wheel size/tire size ...... 307 Operating the DVD ...... 194 Wind deflector (cleaning instruc- see also Digital Operator's Man- tions) ...... 265 ual ...... 234 Wind screen ...... 91 VIN Wind screen (cleaning instruc- Seat ...... 312 tions) ...... 265 Index 21

Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...... 123 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ...... 260 Important safety notes ...... 316 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ...... 116 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 115 Switching on/off ...... 114 Winter driving Important safety notes ...... 287 Slippery road surfaces ...... 150 Snow chains ...... 287 Winter tires M+S tires ...... 287 Wiper blades Cleaning ...... 266 Important safety notes ...... 115 Replacing ...... 115 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...... 268 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Z ZONE function Switching on/off ...... 123 22 Digital Operator's Manual

Introduction Operation

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor- Calling up the Digital Operator's Man- mation about the safe operation of your vehicle. ual The Digital Operator's Manual additionally X Press the Ø button in the center console. describes further functions and equipment The overview relating to the vehicle appears. installed in your vehicle. The functions of the X vehicle and multimedia system are described in Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia X Confirm 7 the message about the warning system. and safety notes. i The basic menu for the Digital Operator's You will not incur any costs when calling up Manual appears. the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. Operating the Digital Operator's Man- There are three ways to access the topics of the ual Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search General notes The visual search allows you to explore your Please observe the information about the oper- vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the Y vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can ation of the controller ( page 235). access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access Content pages the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi- cle interior" view. The content pages can be accessed by means of R a visual search, a keyword search or using the Keyword search contents. The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. Further information can be found in the Digital Oper- ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND" section under the "Character entry (telephony)" keyword. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving.

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save book- marks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. Digital Operator's Manual 23

X To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper- ator's Manual remains open in the background. 24 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. General notes Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion. hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom- Introduction planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require you and humanity into account. to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or You too can help to protect the environment re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen- by operating your vehicle in an environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the tally responsible manner. environment. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Roperating conditions of your vehicle H Ryour personal driving style Environmental note You can influence both factors. You should Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major bear the following in mind: assemblies and parts which are of the same Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new R avoid short trips as these increase fuel con- parts. sumption. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- are correct. ces, as well as control units and sensors for R these restraint systems, may be installed in do not carry any unnecessary weight. the following areas of your vehicle: R remove roof racks once you no longer need Rdoors them. Rdoor pillars R a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute Rdoor sills to environmental protection. You should Rseats therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rcockpit R always have service work carried out at a Rinstrument cluster qualified specialist workshop. Rcenter console Personal driving style: Do not install accessories such as audio sys- Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating starting the engine. efficiency of the restraint systems. R do not warm up the engine when the vehicle Have aftermarket accessories installed at a is stationary. qualified specialist workshop. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance You could jeopardize the operating safety of from the vehicle in front. your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This braking. could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant Service and vehicle operation 25 systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu- tions in the Service and Warranty Information ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual- booklet. ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will have been specifically approved for your vehi- replace and repair all factory-installed parts in cle. accordance with the following warranty terms Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to and conditions: strict quality control. Every part has been spe- RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty cifically developed, manufactured or selected R for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Emission System Warranty Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should REmission Performance Warranty therefore be used. RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- Introduction More than 300,000 different genuine setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island Mercedes-Benz parts are available for and Vermont Emission Control System War- Mercedes-Benz models. ranty All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for laws) necessary service and repair work. In addition, Replacement parts and accessories are covered strategically located parts delivery centers pro- by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories vide quick and reliable parts service. warranties. These are available at any author- Always specify the vehicle identification number ized Mercedes-Benz Center. (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Y page 311). parts ( Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Infor- Operator's Manual mation booklet will be posted to you. Vehicle equipment i This Operator's Manual describes all models Information for customers in Califor- and all standard and optional equipment of nia your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possi- Under California law you may be entitled to a ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the feature all functions described here. This also purchase price or lease price, if after a reason- applies to safety-relevant systems and func- able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz tions. The equipment in your vehicle may USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service therefore differ from that shown in the facilities fail to fix one or more substantial descriptions and illustrations. defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. The original purchase agreement lists all sys- During the period of 18 months from original tems installed in your vehicle. delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of Should you have any questions concerning 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the equipment and operation, please consult an odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre- The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book- sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more let are important documents and should be kept of the following occurs: in the vehicle. (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is Service and vehicle operation driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and condi-

Z 26 Service and vehicle operation

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, Change of address or change of own- LLC in writing of the need for its repair. ership (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) In the event of a change of address, please send has been subject to repair four or more us the "Notification of Address Change" in the times and you have directly notified Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center repair. (USA) at the hotline number (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at

Introduction repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact- total of more than 30 calendar days. ing you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire Please send your written notice to: literature in the vehicle so that it is available to Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC the next owner. Customer Assistance Center If you have purchased a used car, please send us One Mercedes Drive the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number Maintenance 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Vehicle operation outside the USA Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet and Canada with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign advisor will record every service for you in the countries, please be aware that: Service and Warranty Booklet. Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Roadside Assistance converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- R gram offers technical help in the event of a the fuel may have a considerably lower octane breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis- rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam- tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 age. hours a day, 365 days a year. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) delivery in Europe through our European Deliv- (USA) ery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) following addresses. For additional information, refer to the In the USA Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC section in the Service and Warranty booklet European Delivery Department (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit- One Mercedes Drive erature portfolio. Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety 27

Operating safety ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high Important safety notes curb or an unpaved road G WARNING Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road If you do not have the prescribed service/ Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or maintenance work or any required repairs parts of the chassis carried out, this can result in malfunctions or In situations like this, the body, the undercar- system failures. There is a risk of an accident. riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be Always have the prescribed service/mainte- damaged without the damage being visible. Introduction nance work as well as any required repairs Components damaged in this way can unex- carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. G WARNING If the underbody paneling is damaged, com- Flammable material such as leaves, grass or bustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with twigs can gather between the underbody and hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk the underbody paneling. If these materials of fire. come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, In such situations, have the vehicle checked check the vehicle's underside regularly. In and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- particular, remove parts of plants or other cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour- flammable materials which have become ney you notice that driving safety is impaired, trapped. In the case of damage, contact a pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, qualified specialist workshop. paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their Declarations of conformity function and/or the function of other net- worked components. In particular, systems Vehicle components which receive relevant to safety could also be affected. As a and/or transmit radio waves result, these may no longer function as inten- USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com- ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an subject to the two following two conditions: 1) accident and injury. These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- interference received, including interference tronic components or their software. You that may cause undesired operation. Changes should have all work to electrical and elec- or modifications not expressly approved by the tronic equipment carried out at a qualified party responsible for compliance could void the specialist workshop. user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device."

Z 28 Operating safety

Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: The diagnostics connection is only intended for Rwork relevant to safety the connection of diagnostic equipment at a R qualified specialist workshop. service and maintenance work Rrepair work G WARNING Ralterations, installation work and modifica- If you connect equipment to the diagnostics tions connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Rwork on electronic components operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, Introduction the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Correct use Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth- tics connection in the vehicle. ers could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. G WARNING Observe the following information when driving Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the your vehicle: pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Rthe safety notes in this manual The operating and road safety of the vehicle is Rthe vehicle technical data jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Rtraffic rules and regulations Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter vehicles the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use Problems with your vehicle loose floormats and do not place floormats on If you should experience a problem with your top of one another. vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact ! If the engine is switched off and equipment an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi- on the diagnostics connection is used, the ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti- starter battery may discharge. fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat- isfaction, please discuss the problem again with Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con- a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor- the following addresses. mation being reset, for example. This may lead In the USA to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspec- Customer Assistance Center tion. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Qualified specialist workshop In Canada An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali- Customer Relations Department fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to 98 Vanderhoof Avenue correctly carry out the work required on your Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Reporting safety defects USA only: Data stored in the vehicle 29

The following text is published as required of content/asportal/en/communication/ manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed- informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". Data stored in the vehicle If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury Data storage or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration A wide range of electronic components in your (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz vehicle contain data memories. USA, LLC. These data memories temporarily or perma- Introduction If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may nently store technical information about: open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Rvehicle's operating state defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order Rincidents a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Rmalfunctions cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz In general, this technical information docu- USA, LLC. ments the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at These include, for example: 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Roperating conditions of system components, http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin- e.g. fluid levels istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its Washington, DC 20590. individual components, e.g. number of wheel You can also obtain other information about revolutions/speed, deceleration in move- motor vehicle safety from ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal http://www.safercar.gov position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Limited Warranty Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in ! special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy- Follow the instructions in this manual about ment, intervention of stability control sys- the proper operation of your vehicle as well as tems about possible vehicle damage. Damage to Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature your vehicle that arises from culpable contra- ventions against these instructions is not cov- This data is of an exclusively technical nature ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited and can be used to: Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War- Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc- ranty. tions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident QR codes for the rescue card Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap movements. and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor- event of an accident, rescue services can use mation can be read from the event data memory the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res- and malfunction data memory. cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue Services include, for example: card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the Rrepair services routing of the electric cables. Rservice processes You can find more information under http:// Rwarranties portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ Rquality assurance

Z 30 Data stored in the vehicle

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record vice network (including the manufacturer) using such data as: special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor- RHow various systems in your vehicle were mation is obtained from it, if required. operating After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor- RWhether or not the driver and passenger mation is deleted from the malfunction memory safety belts were buckled/fastened or is continually overwritten. RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the When operating the vehicle, situations are con- accelerator and/or brake pedal and ceivable in which this technical data, in connec- RHow fast the vehicle was traveling.

Introduction tion with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could These data can help provide a better under- be traced to a person. standing of the circumstances in which acci- Examples include: dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial Raccident reports crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by Rdamage to the vehicle the EDR under normal driving conditions and no Rwitness statements personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci- Further additional functions that have been con- dent location) are recorded. However, other par- tractually agreed upon with the customer allow ties, such as law enforcement could combine certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi- EDR data with the type of personally identifying cle as well. The additional functions include, for data routinely acquired during a crash investi- example, vehicle location in case of an emer- gation. gency. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the COMAND/mbrace vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforce- If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or ment, can read the information by accessing the mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's vehicle or the EDR. operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit- EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat- uations, and the location of the vehicle may be ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci- compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys- dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash tem. Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract For additional information please refer to the data from the EDR is commercially available, COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi- disclaims any and all liability arising from the tions. extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others Event data recorders without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the This vehicle is equipped with an event data lessee. Exceptions to this representation recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an include responses to subpoenas by law enforce- event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of ment; by federal, state or local government; in an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near connection with or arising out of litigation involv- crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy- ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will as required by law. assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems Warning: The EDR is a component of the performed. The EDR is designed to record data Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter- related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems ing, modifying or removing the EDR component for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys- or less. tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. Information on copyright 31

This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic Introduction components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Z 32 Cockpit

Cockpit At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shift- F Adjusts the steering wheel 102 ers 138 Steering wheel heating 103 ; Combination switch 110 G Cruise control lever 151 = Instrument cluster 33 H Parking brake 145 ? Horn I Diagnostics connection 28 A DIRECT SELECT lever 134 J Opens the hood 257 B PARKTRONIC warning dis- K Releases the parking brake 145 play 163 L Light switch 109 C Overhead control panel 38 D Climate control systems 117 E Ignition lock 128 Start/Stop button 128 Instrument cluster 33

Instrument cluster At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Fuel gauge (left) ; Speedometer with segments 189 Coolant temperature (right) 189 = Multifunction display 191 Warning and indicator lamps: ÷ ESP® 227 ? Tachometer 189 · Distance warning 232 Warning and indicator lamps: $ å ESP® OFF 227 Brakes (USA only) 226 J # Turn signal, left 110 Brakes (Canada only) 226 # ? Coolant 230 Turn signal, right 110 ! K High-beam headlamps 110 ABS 227 6 L Low-beam headlamps 110 Restraint system 40 ; T Parking lamps 110 Check Engine 230 h R This lamp has no func- Tire pressure monitor 233 tion 110 ü Seat belts 225 8 Reserve fuel 230 Fuel filler flap location indicator: the fuel filler cap is on the right-hand side.

Information on the display of the outside temperature in the multifunction display can be found under "Outside temperature display" (Y page 189). Set the lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior using the on-board computer (Y page 199). 34 Multifunction steering wheel

Multifunction steering wheel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 191 A =; ; Multimedia system display Selects a menu 190 9: = ? Selects a submenu or scrolls Switches on voice-operated through lists 190 navigation or the Voice Con- a trol System Confirms a selection 190 ? ~ Hides display messages 202 Rejects or ends a call 195 B % Exits the telephone book/ Back 190 redial memory 6 Switches off voice-operated navigation or the Voice Con- Makes or accepts a call trol System Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute

i In vehicles with the COMAND multimedia system you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions Multifunction steering wheel 35 i In vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia system you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions At a glance 36 Center console

Center console Center console, upper section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multimedia system (see the B £ Hazard warning lamps 111 separate operating instructions) C 45Indicator lamp 49 ; c Seat heating 100 D ATA indicator lamp 71 = s Seat ventilation 101 E Moves the seat-belt extender forwards 43 ? Ò AIRSCARF 102 F Ò AIRSCARF 102 A ¤ ECO start/stop function 131 Center console 37

Center console, lower section At a glance

Function Page Function Page G Cup holder 243 N Stowage compartment with Media Interface 241 H Stowage compartment 240 Cup holder 243 O Ü Retracts the rear seat head restraints 98 I à Dynamic handling package with sports mode 163 P Ú Selects the drive program 137 J c PARKTRONIC 163 Q Multimedia system control- K AIRCAP 93 ler (see the separate operating instructions) L Opens and closes the side windows 82 M Opens and closes the soft top 85 38 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : u Switches the rear inte- D Microphone for mbrace rior lighting on/off 113 (emergency call system), telephone and Voice Control ; | Switches the automatic System (see the separate interior lighting control operating instructions) on/off 113 E F Breakdown assistance = p Switches the right- call button (mbrace system) 248 hand reading lamp on/off 113 F p Switches the left-hand ? ï MB Info call button reading lamp on/off 113 (mbrace system) 248 G c Switches the front inte- A G SOS button (mbrace rior lighting on/off 113 system) 247 B Rear-view mirror 106 C Buttons for the garage door opener 253 Door control panel 39

Door control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : r 45= B W Opens/closes the side Stores settings for the seat, windows 83 exterior mirrors and steering wheel 108 C n Activates/deactivates the override feature for the ; Adjusts the seats electrically 97 side windows in the rear compartment 61 = %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 79 D o Opens the trunk lid 81 ? Opens the door 78 A 7 Z ö \ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 105 40 Occupant safety

Panic alarm The driver is also responsible for ensuring that the steering wheel has been correctly positioned. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 96). Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 45). An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if the protection already provided by a correctly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags Safety are not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bags that would increase the degree of protection afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of X To activate: press the ! button : for an accident are deployed. Seat belts and air approximately one second. bags generally do not protect against objects A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the penetrating the vehicle from the outside. alarm system is armed. Information on restraint system operation can X To deactivate: press the ! button : be found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten- again. sioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53). or See “Children in the vehicle” for information on X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. children traveling with you as well as vehicle or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: restraint systems (Y page 57). X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING Occupant safety Modifications to the restraint system may Introduction to the restraint system cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi- intended protective function and may fail in an cle occupants coming into contact with parts of accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system may also This poses an increased risk of injury or even reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu- fatal injury. pants when an accident occurs. Never modify parts of the restraint system. The restraint system includes: Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic RSeat belt system components or their software. RAir bags If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to RChild restraint system accommodate a person with disabilities, con- RChild seat securing system tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for The components of the restraint system work in details. USA only: for further information con- conjunction with each other. They can only offer tact our Customer Assistance Center at the intended level of protection if all vehicle 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). occupants: Rare correctly wearing their seat belts. (Y page 43) Restraint system warning lamp Radjust their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 96). The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at Occupant safety 41 regular intervals while the engine is running. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in informs you about the status of the front- good time. passenger front air bag. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is lamp: switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec- Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag is onds after the vehicle is started. The compo- deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the nents of the restraint system are in operational event of an accident. readiness. Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag is A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all system warning lamp: deployment criteria are met, the front- R does not light up after the ignition is switched passenger front air bag is deployed. Safety on Depending on the person in the front-passenger Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the seat, the front-passenger front air bag must engine running either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol- Rlights up again while the engine is running lowing points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. G WARNING RChildren in a child restraint system: If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint whether the front-passenger front air bag is system components may be triggered unin- enabled or deactivated depends on the instal- tentionally or might not be triggered at all in led child restraint system, and the age and the event of an accident with a high rate of size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Chil- gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- dren in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There you ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or will also find instructions on rearward and even fatal injury. forward-facing child restraint systems on the Have the restraint system checked and front-passenger seat. repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as RAll other persons: depending on the classi- soon as possible. fication of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 48). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator belts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags" lamp (Y page 45). There you can also find information on the correct seat position.

Seat belts Introduction Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : is thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle part of the Occupant Classification System occupant in the best position in relation to the (OCS). air bag.

Z 42 Occupant safety

The seat belt system comprises: ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- RSeat belts tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front even fatal injury. seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear Make sure that all vehicle occupants are R Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts seated properly with a correctly fastened seat and the outer seat belts in the rear belt. If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt extender quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt G WARNING retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac- ted any further. The seat belt does not offer the intended level The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the of protection if you have not moved the back- Safety seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- against the body. However it does not pull the ing or in the event of an accident, you could vehicle occupant back in the direction of the slide underneath the seat belt and sustain backrest. abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor- poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. injury. When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to Adjust the seat properly before beginning reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the your journey. Always ensure that the backrest vehicle occupant. is in an almost vertical position and that the The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are shoulder section of your seat belt is routed synchronized with the front air bags, which across the center of your shoulder. absorb part of the deceleration force. This can reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu- G WARNING pants during an accident. ! Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot If the front-passenger seat is not occupied, fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other- tional suitable restraint system. If the seat wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer- belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect gency Tensioning Device and front-passenger as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- front air bag may be triggered and would need tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for to be replaced. example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an Important safety notes increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. The use of seat belts and child restraint systems For this reason, always secure persons under is required by law in: 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Rall 50 states systems. Rthe U.S. territories R If a child younger than twelve years old and the District of Columbia under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the Rall Canadian provinces vehicle: Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle Ralways secure the child in a child restraint occupants should correctly fasten their seat system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi- belts before starting the journey. cle. The child restraint system must be appro- G WARNING priate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- notes on "Children in the vehicle" not protect as intended. Furthermore, an (Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- Occupant safety 43

system manufacturer's installation and oper- Only then can the forces produced in the ating instructions event of an accident be evenly distributed Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety across the belt. notes on the "Occupant classification system RThe shoulder section of the belt must always (OCS)" (Y page 48) be routed across the center of the shoulder. G WARNING The shoulder section of the belt should not come into contact with your neck and must The seat belts may not perform their intended not be routed under the arm. protective function if: RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos- Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely sible over your lap. dirty, bleach or dyed The lap belt must always pass across your hip

joints and never across your stomach or Safety R the seat belt buckle is damaged or abdomen. Pregnant women must take partic- extremely dirty ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt pushed down across the hip joints and pulled anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- tight using the shoulder section. R fied The seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed or fragile objects. Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g. an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi- eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, in a more suitable location. e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten- ROnly one person should use each seat belt at sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or any one time. fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an On no account should babies or children increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if the reels. Make sure that the seat belts are seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’s undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- occupants. ing an accident, have the seat belts checked Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g. immediately at a qualified specialist work- cushions, between the occupant and the seat. shop. Seat belts are solely intended for the protection and restraint of the vehicle occupants. To Only use seat belts that have been approved for secure objects, luggage or loads, always your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 240).

Proper use of the seat belts Fastening a seat belt Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat Observe the safety notes on the seat belt belt (Y page 42). (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seat All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt belts (Y page 43). correctly before setting off. Make sure that all G occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly WARNING for the entire journey. If the seat-belt extender is extended during When fastening the seat belt, make sure that: the journey, the seat belt is not fitted properly RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt on the body. The seat belt can then no longer buckle that belongs to the seat. perform its intended protective function. This RThe seat belt is tightened across your body. poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter injury. coat. RThe seat belt is not twisted.

Z 44 Occupant safety

Always make sure that the seat-belt extender is retracted during a journey. Safety

The seat-belt extender for the driver and front passenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat- belt extender = is extended when the respec- Basic illustration tive door is closed and the SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Adjust the seat (Y page 96). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-belt extender = and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. You can also extend seat-belt extender = with In order to attach the child restraint system seat-belt extender button ?. securely in the vehicle, the seat belts in the rear are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. X Press seat-belt extender button ?. Further information can be found under "Special Seat-belt extender = extends. seat belt retractor" (Y page 57). Seat-belt extender = is retracted again if: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt Automatic comfort-install feature buckle. R The front seat belts have an automatic comfort- the belt tongue is not engaged in the seat belt install feature. The automatic comfort-fit feature buckle within 60 seconds. reduces the retraction force of the seat belts. Rthe respective door is opened. The seat belts are thus routed more comfortably Rthe SmartKey is turned to position 0 in the for the driver and front passenger. ignition lock. Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it for- Releasing seat belts wards. ! Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied after Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. approximately five seconds. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. ? If you press seat-belt extender button after This could damage the door, the door trim = this, seat-belt extender will not extend. panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts Occupant safety 45

can no longer fulfill their protective function increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe- driver or front passenger have fastened their cialist workshop. seat belts. X Press the release button in the belt buckle, If the driver or front passenger unfasten their hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn- back. ing is activated again. i More information on the 7 seat belt Seat belt adjustment warning lamp can be found under "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of seat belt" (Y page 225). the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-

tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger Safety seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. Air bags The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle when Introduction the seat-belt extender is retracted and The air bag installation point is identified by the Rthe ignition is switched on label AIR BAG. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain An air bag supplements a correctly fastened retraction force if any slack is detected between seat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub- the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi- hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust- tional protection in the event of an accident. ing. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and various air bag systems work independently of off in the on-board computer (Y page 201). each other (Y page 53). There is, however, no system available today Belt warning for the driver and front that can completely rule out injury or death. passenger It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury 7 caused by an air bag due to the high speed at The seat belt warning lamp in the instru- which the air bag must be deployed. ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be Important safety notes a warning tone. G WARNING Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn- If you do not sit in the correct seat position, ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the the air bag cannot protect as intended and engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver could even cause additional injury when or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas- deployed. This poses an increased risk of tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv- injury or even fatal injury. er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened To avoid hazardous situations, always make or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: belt warning lamp goes out. Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will including pregnant women sound. The warning tone switches off after six Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas- est possible distance to the air bags tened. Rfollow the following instructions If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- Always make sure that there are no objects passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning between the air bag and the vehicle's occu- tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with pants.

Z 46 Occupant safety

RAdjust the seats properly before beginning Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on your journey. Always make sure that the seat the grab handles or coat hooks. is in an almost upright position. The center of Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are the head restraint must support the head at attached to the vehicle within the deployment about eye level. area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats rear side trim or side walls. as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi- Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. the pockets of your clothing. Store such ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. objects in a suitable place. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. G WARNING RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects Safety door or side window. You may otherwise be in such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer the deployment area of the air bags. function correctly. There is an increased risk RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of injury. of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash- Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects board, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. to it. R For this reason, always secure persons less G than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys- WARNING tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot Sensors to control the air bags are located in be worn correctly. the doors. Modifications or work not per- If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also formed correctly to the doors or door panel- observe the following notes: ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the RAlways secure children under twelve years of function of the sensors being impaired. The air age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable bags might therefore not function properly child restraint systems. anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot R Child restraint systems should be installed on protect vehicle occupants as they are the rear seats. designed to do. There is an increased risk of ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child injury. restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Always have work on the doors or door pan- indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front- eling carried out at a qualified specialist work- passenger front air bag is deactivated shop. (Y page 41). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System Front air bags (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Occupant safety 47

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer- You should only use seat covers that have ; ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag been approved for the respective seat by deploys in front of and above the glove box. Mercedes-Benz. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp informs you about the status of the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 41). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if:

Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor Safety readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 48) Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up (Y page 49) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a Front side impact air bags : and rear side high accident severity impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol- ster of the seat backrest. Driver's knee bag When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering passenger seat is occupied or column. The driver's knee bag is triggered Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle together with the front air bag. of the front-passenger seat The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant the side impact air bag on the front-passenger in the driver's seat. side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent Side impact air bags of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Z 48 Occupant safety

Head bags You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Safety

Head bags : deploy in the area of the side windows at the front. When deployed, the headbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the outer protect the: seat cushions. R When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances the chest level of protection of the vehicle occupants on Rarms the side of the vehicle on which the impact In the event of a side impact, the headbag is occurs. deployed on the side on which the impact The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of the occurs. impact. If the system determines that they can offer The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side additional protection to that provided by the does not deploy under the following conditions: seat belt, a headbag may be deployed in other R accident situations (Y page 53). OCS has detected that the front-passenger seat is unoccupied. The headbag on the front-passenger side does R not deploy under the following conditions: the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. R If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, OCS has detected that the front-passenger the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side seat is unoccupied. deploys if an appropriate accident situation Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fastened. occurs. In this case, deployment is independent If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied the headbag on the front-passenger side or not. deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Occupant Classification System or not. (OCS) Pelvis air bags Introduction G WARNING The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even Depending on that result, the front-passenger prevent the deployment of the air bags inte- front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. grated into the seats. Consequently, the air The system does not deactivate: bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as Rthe side impact air bag they are designed to do. In addition, the func- R tion of the Occupant Classification System the pelvis air bag R (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an the front-passenger head bag R increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. the Emergency Tensioning Devices Occupant safety 49

Prerequisites PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp : indicates whether the front-passenger front air To be classified correctly, the front passenger bag is disabled. must sit: X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the R with the seat belt fastened correctly ignition lock, or in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, Rin an almost upright position with their back press the start/stop button once or twice. against the seat backrest The system carries out a self-diagnosis test. R with their feet resting on the floor, if possible The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If the front passenger does not observe these must light up for about six seconds. conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica- The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp tion, e.g. because the front passenger: then shows the status of the front-passenger

Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- front air bag. If the status of the front-passenger Safety selves on a vehicle armrest front air bag changes whilst the vehicle is in Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised motion, an air bag display message may appear Y from the seat cushion in the instrument cluster ( page 209). Always observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator If it is absolutely necessary to install a child lamp when the front-passenger seat is occu- restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be pied. Make sure that the status of the front- sure to observe the correct positioning of the passenger front air bag is correct before and child restraint system. Never place objects during a journey. under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator system must always rest on the seat cushion of lamp: the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the Rlights up, the front-passenger front air bag is forward-facing child restraint system must lie as disabled. It will then not be deployed in the flat as possible against the backrest of the front- event of an accident. passenger seat. Rdoes not light up, the front-passenger front The child restraint system must not touch the air bag is enabled. If, in the case of an acci- roof or be subjected to a load by the head dent, all deployment criteria are met, the restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest front-passenger front air bag is deployed. and the head restraint position accordingly. G Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function WARNING correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator tem manufacturer's installation instructions. lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of Occupant Classification System opera- an accident and cannot perform its intended tion (OCS) protective function. A person in the front- passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

Z 50 Occupant safety

bled in accordance with the person in the If OCS detects that: front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied, the Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continuously after the system's self- back as far back as possible. diagnosis test. This indicates that the front- Rthe person is seated correctly. passenger front air bag is deactivated. Make sure, both before and during the jour- Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a ney, that the status of the front-passenger child aged up to twelve months in a standard front air bag is correct. child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continu- G ously after the system's self-diagnosis test. WARNING This indicates that the front-passenger front Safety If you secure a child in a child restraint system air bag is deactivated. on the front-passenger seat and the In the case of a twelve-month-old child in a PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is standard child restraint system, the off, the front-passenger front air bag can PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may go out after the system's self-diagnosis test. deploy in the event of an accident. The child This indicates that the front-passenger front could be struck by the air bag. This poses an air bag is activated. Categorization is depend- increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. ent on the type of child restraint system and Make sure that the front-passenger front air the stature of the child, for example. In this bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR case, always install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or a G WARNING small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF If you secure a child in a forward-facing child indicator lamp lights up continuously or goes restraint system on the front-passenger seat off after the system's self-diagnosis test and you position the front-passenger seat too depending on the categorization. close to the dashboard, in the event of an - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator accident, the child could: lamp is off, position the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte- person of smaller stature can sit on a rear rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- seat. cator lamp is lit, for example - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER lamp lights up, a person of smaller stature should not sit on the front-passenger seat. AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an This poses an increased risk of injury or even adult or a person of an appropriate size, the fatal injury. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Move the front-passenger seat as far back as goes out after the system's self-diagnosis possible. Always make sure that the shoulder test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to seat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guide observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" on the child restraint system. The shoulder (Y page 57). belt strap must be routed forwards and down- If the OCS is malfunctioning, both the red 6 wards from the retracted vehicle seat-belt restraint system warning lamp in the instrument extender. If necessary, adjust the front- cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- passenger seat accordingly. Always observe cator lamp light up simultaneously. In this case, the child restraint system manufacturer's the front-passenger air bag is deactivated and installation instructions. does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as Occupant safety 51 soon as possible. Consult an authorized board. This poses an increased risk of injury or Mercedes-Benz Center. Only have the front- even fatal injury. passenger seat repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the always ensure that: seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary Rthe classification of the person in the front- repair work carried out at an authorized passenger seat is correct and the front- Mercedes-Benz Center. passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that bled in accordance with the person in the have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. front-passenger seat If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not Rthe person is seated properly with a cor- Safety mean that the front-passenger front air bag will rectly fastened seatbelt also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys- Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat. Depending on the result, as far back as possible the front-passenger air bag is activated or deac- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator tivated. lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not System self-test install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- G DANGER cation System (OCS) checked and repaired If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator immediately at a qualified specialist work- lamp does not light up during the system self- shop. test, then the system is malfunctioning. The front-passenger front air bag might be trig- G WARNING gered unintentionally or might not be trig- Objects between the seat surface and the gered at all in the event of an accident with child restraint system could affect OCS oper- high deceleration. This poses an increased ation. This could result in the front-passenger risk of injury or even fatal injury. air bag not functioning as intended during an In this case the front-passenger seat may not accident. This poses an increased risk of be used. Do not install a child restraint system injury or even fatal injury. on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- Do not place any objects between the seat pant Classification System (OCS) checked surface and the child restraint system. The and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- entire base of the child restraint system must cialist workshop. always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forward- G WARNING facing child restraint system must, as far as If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator possible, be resting on the backrest of the lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will child restraint system manufacturer's instal- not be deployed in the event of an accident. In lation instructions. this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of Y passenger seat. the front-passenger front air bag ( page 49). For more information about the OCS, see "Prob- That person could, for example, come into lems with the Occupant Classification System" contact with the vehicle's interior, especially (Y page 52). if the person is sitting too close to the dash-

Z 52 Occupant safety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor- BAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the front- on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49). passenger seat is occu- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front- pied by an adult or a per- passenger seat may not be used. son of a stature corre- X Safety sponding to that of an Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- adult. Benz Center. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible Runoccupied against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Roccupied with the adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. weight of a child up to X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat twelve months old in a belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger child restraint system seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center.

Roll bar G WARNING G DANGER Risk of injury if the roll bar is triggered. Ensure that the movement area of the rear If the roll bar has developed a malfunction, it head restraints is kept clear. may not function, e.g. in the event of an accident. The roll bars may then not protect the The roll bars are under the rear head restraints. vehicle occupants as intended. This poses an They extend if systems detect that the vehicle is increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. in danger of rollover. Thus the rear head Have roll bars checked immediately at a quali- restraints also extend automatically. fied specialist workshop. Once the roll bars are extended, you can no longer lower the rear head restraints. An open soft Occupant safety 53 top can no longer be closed. In this case, visit released. The 6 restraint system warning the nearest qualified specialist workshop. lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear- ing. The powder that is released generally does Deployment of Emergency Tensioning not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause Devices and air bags short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided Important safety notes it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to pre- G WARNING vent breathing difficulties. The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has Air bags and pyrotechni c Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,

been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Safety which may require special handling and regard Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a for the environment. National guidelines must deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- be observed during disposal. In California, see cialist workshop as soon as possible. www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm. G WARNING Method of operation A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended pro- During the first stage of a collision, the restraint tection in an accident. There is an increased system control unit evaluates important physi- risk of injury. cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- R ist workshop in order to have a deployed air duration R bag replaced. direction Rintensity It is important for your safety and that of your Based on the evaluation of this data, the passenger to have deployed air bags replaced restraint system control unit triggers the Emer- and to have any malfunctioning air bags gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags rear collision. continue to perform their protective function for An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. triggered, if: G WARNING Rthe ignition is switched on Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices Rthe components of the restraint system are that have been deployed are no longer opera- operational. You can find further information under: "Restraint system warning lamp" tional and are unable to perform their inten- (Y page 40) ded protective function. This poses an Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. the respective front-passenger seat Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear sioning Devices which have been triggered compartment are triggered independently of the immediately replaced at a qualified specialist lock status of the seat belts. workshop. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig- the restraint system are activated independ- ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous ently of each other in certain frontal collision situations. This procedure is reversible. situations: If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered RFront air bags and driver's knee bag or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, RHead bag, if the system determines that and a small amount of powder may also be deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt

Z 54 Occupant safety

The front-passenger front air bag is activated or seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rear deactivated depending on the person on the compartment seats front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air air bag can only deploy in an accident if the bags and pelvis air bags are not deployed PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. The side impact air bag on the front- Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR Y passenger side (front) deploys under the fol- BAG OFF indicator lamp ( page 41). lowing conditions: Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During - the OCS system detects that the front- the first deployment stage, the front air bag is passenger seat is occupied or filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec- buckle of the front-passenger seat

Safety ond deployment threshold is reached within a RHead bag on the side of impact, independ- few milliseconds. ently of the use of the seat belt and inde- The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten- pendently of whether the front-passenger sioning Devices and the air bag are determined seat is occupied by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or REmergency Tensioning Devices, if the system acceleration which occurs at various points in determines that deployment can offer addi- the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in tional protection in this situation nature. Deployment should take place in good RHead bags on the driver's and front- time at the start of the collision. passenger side in certain situations when the The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration vehicle rolls over, if the system determines and the direction of the force are essentially that deployment can offer additional protec- determined by: tion to that provided by the seat belt Rthe distribution of forces during the collision i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Rthe collision angle The different air bag systems work independ- Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle ently of each other. Rthe characteristics of the object with which How the air bag system works is determined the vehicle has collided by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or accel- Factors which can only be seen and measured eration and the apparent type of accident: after a collision has occurred do not play a deci- sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do RFrontal collision they provide an indication of air bag deploy- RSide impact ment. RRollover The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed NECK-PRO head restraints are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even Important safety notes though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid G WARNING vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem- bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs The function of the head restraint may be as a result. impaired if you: If the restraint system control unit detects a side Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the impact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicable head restraints, for example components of the restraint system are activa- R ted independently of each other depending on use head restraint covers the apparent type of accident. If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on the their intended protective function in the event side of impact, independently of the Emer- of an accident. In addition, objects attached gency Tensioning Device and the use of the to the head restraints could endanger other Occupant safety 55

X vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint = of injury. cushion back in the direction of arrow until the cushion engages. Do not attach any objects to the head X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK- restraints and do not use head restraint cov- PRO head restraint. ers. i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty Method of operation resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihood this work carried out at a qualified specialist of head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO head workshop. restraints on the driver's and front-passenger seats are moved forwards and upwards in the Safety event of a rear-end collision of a certain severity. PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant This provides better head support. protection system) If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered in an accident, you must reset the NECK- Introduction PRO head restraints on the driver’s and front- ® passenger seat (Y page 55). Otherwise, the In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE additional protection will not be available in the takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi- event of another rear-end collision. You can rec- cle occupants. ognize when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the fact that they have moved Important safety notes forwards and can no longer be adjusted. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the Make sure that there are no objects in the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for func- footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger tionality at a qualified specialist workshop after that the seats and/or objects could be dam- ® a rear-end collision. aged when PRE-SAFE is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE- Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of an restraints accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle under- steers or oversteers severely Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack- Do not insert your finger between the upholstery age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the of the head restraint and the seat. Pay particular radar sensor system detects an imminent attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head danger of collision in certain situations restraints. ® X PRE-SAFE takes the following measures Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint depending on the hazardous situation detected: cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. R X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion the front seat belts are pre-tensioned. down as far as it will go in the direction of Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in arrow ;. an unfavorable position.

Z 56 Occupant safety

Rif the vehicle skids, the front side windows are Function closed. ® Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the seat PRE-SAFE PLUS intervenes in certain situa- backrests of the front multicontour seats is tions if the radar sensor system detects an raised. imminent head-on or rear-end collision. ® If the hazardous situation passes without result- PRE-SAFE PLUS takes the following measures ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt depending on the hazardous situation detected: pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour Rif the radar sensor system detects that a seats, the air pressure in the side bolsters is head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts reduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® are pre-tensioned. can then be reversed. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-

Safety If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: end collision is imminent: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly - the brake pressure is increased if the driver when the vehicle is stationary. applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta- The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and tionary. the locking mechanism is released. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. ® The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of The PRE-SAFE PLUS braking application is can- the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa- celed: tion about the convenience function can be Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a found under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45). gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu- Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pant protection system PLUS) pull away If the hazardous situation passes without result- Introduction ing in an accident, the original settings are restored. PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. ® Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE Automatic measures after an acci- PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end dent collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive Immediately after an accident, the following measures to protect the vehicle occupants. measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Important safety notes Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated R The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot the emergency lighting is activated prevent an imminent collision. Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked The driver is not warned about the intervention Rthe front side windows are lowered of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. Rvehicles with a memory function: the electri- PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi- cally adjustable steering wheel is raised cle is backing up. Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply When driving, or when parking or exiting a park- is cut off ing space with assistance from Active Parking Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the call brakes. Children in the vehicle 57

Children in the vehicle dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child Important safety notes restraint system. There is a risk of injury. Accident statistics show that children secured If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with in the rear seats are safer than children secured you, always ensure that the child restraint in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child are generally better protected there. restraint system has been exposed to direct If a child younger than twelve years old and sunlight, let it cool down before securing the under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the child in it. Never leave children unattended in vehicle: the vehicle. Safety Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have The child restraint system must be appropri- their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting ate to the age, weight and size of the child properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child Observe the safety notes on the seat belt Y restraint system manufacturer's installation ( page 42)and the notes on correct use of seat Y instructions belts ( page 43). Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety A booster seat may be necessary to achieve notes on the "Occupant classification system proper seat belt positioning for children over (OCS)" (Y page 48) 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened G WARNING without a booster seat. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Special seat belt retractor Rrelease the parking brake. G Rshift the automatic transmission out of the WARNING parking position P. If the seat belt is released while driving, the Rstart the engine. child restraint system will no longer be In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a an accident and injury. portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an When leaving the vehicle, always take the increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate G WARNING the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even equipped with a special seat belt retractor. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the When activated, the special seat belt retractor vehicle. ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once the child restraint system has been secured. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

Z 58 Children in the vehicle

Installing a child restraint system: always resting completely on the seat cush- X Always comply with the child restraint system ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under manufacturer's installation instructions. or behind the child restraint system. Only use X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of the child restraint systems with the original cover seat-belt extender and the rear seat belt out designed for them. Only replace damaged of the belt outlet. covers with genuine covers. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: G WARNING X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia If the child restraint system is installed incor- reel retract it again. rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in

Safety While the seat belt is retracting, you should the event of an accident, heavy braking or a hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt sudden change in direction. The child retractor is activated. restraint system could be thrown about, strik- X Push the child seat restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Removing a child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make X Always comply with the child restraint system sure that you observe the child restraint sys- manufacturer's installation instructions. tem manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back to You will find further information on stowing the seat-belt extender in the front and the belt objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide- outlet in the rear. lines" (Y page 240). The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing sys- Child restraint system tems which have been damaged or subjected The use of seat belts and child restraint systems to a load in an accident can no longer protect is required by law in: as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy Rall 50 states braking or sudden changes of direction. There Rthe U.S. territories is an increased risk of injury, possibly even Rthe District of Columbia fatal. Rall Canadian provinces Replace child restraint systems which have You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any author- been damaged or subjected to a load in an ized Mercedes-Benz Center. accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system G WARNING checked at a qualified specialist workshop, If the child restraint system is installed incor- before you install a child restraint system rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as again. intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or The securing systems of child restraint systems sudden changes of direction. There is an are: increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Rthe seat belt system Make sure that you observe the child restraint Rthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings system manufacturer's installation instruc- If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the that the base of the child restraint system is information on the "Occupant Classification Children in the vehicle 59

System (OCS)" (Y page 48). There you will also find information on deactivating the front- passenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. Safety : This confirmation can also be found in the instal- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings are loca- lation instructions that are included with the ted between the seat cushion and the seat back- child restraint system. rest. X Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint rior and on the child restraint system. system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur- specially designed child restraint systems on ing system the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint G WARNING systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also do not offer sufficient protective effect for be used and can be installed using the vehicle's children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs seat belt system. Install the child seat according (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt to the manufacturer's instructions. integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased Child restraint system on the front- risk of injury or even fatal injury. passenger seat If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), General notes only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured Accident statistics show that children secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, child restraint system with the Top Tether Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install belt, if available. the child restraint system on a rear seat. Always comply with the manufacturer's instal- If it is absolutely necessary to install a child lation and operating instructions for the child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, restraint system used. always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH- (OCS)" (Y page 48). type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings

Z 60 Children in the vehicle

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as Child-proof locks a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front- Important safety notes passenger seat G WARNING Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- passenger front air bag If children are traveling in the vehicle, they Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child could: restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- Ropen doors, thus endangering other people board or road users Rearward-facing child restraint system Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming

Safety traffic If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward- Roperate vehicle equipment and become facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always make sure that the trapped front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Always activate the child-proof locks and lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) is the front- override feature if children are traveling in the passenger front air bag deactivated. vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instruc- the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never tions. leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child restraint system Override feature for the rear side windows (Y page 61). If you secure a child in a forward-facing child G WARNING restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- back as possible. The entire base of the child cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: restraint system must always rest on the seat R cushion of the front-passenger seat. The back- release the parking brake. rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat Rshift the automatic transmission out of the as possible against the backrest of the front- parking position P. passenger seat. The child restraint system must Rstart the engine. not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- backrest and the head restraint position accord- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt an accident and injury. strap is correctly routed from the seat-belt extender of the front-passenger seat to the When leaving the vehicle, always take the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint sys- SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. wards from the retracted seat-belt extender for the front-passenger seat. G WARNING Always observe the child restraint system man- If persons, particularly children are subjected ufacturer's installation and operating instruc- to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or tions. cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Driving safety systems 61

G WARNING As a result, they could: If the child restraint system is subjected to Ractivate vehicle equipment and become direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- trapped, for example dren may burn themselves on these parts, Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby particularly on the metal parts of the child endangering other road users restraint system. There is a risk of injury. Unsecured animals could also be flung around If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- you, always ensure that the child restraint den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child and injury. restraint system has been exposed to direct Safety Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- sunlight, let it cool down before securing the cle. Always secure animals properly during child in it. Never leave children unattended in the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans- the vehicle. port box. Override feature for the rear side windows Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 62) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist (Y page 62) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 64) X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear (Y page 66) side windows is disabled. Operation is only REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) possible using the switches in the driver's (Y page 68) door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is R possible using the switches in the rear com- ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68) partment. RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 71)

Pets in the vehicle Important safety notes G WARNING If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are If you leave animals unattended or unsecured inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei- in the vehicle, they could press buttons or ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are switches, for example. merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and

Z 62 Driving safety systems

weather conditions and maintain a safe distance Braking from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. X If ABS intervenes: The driving safety systems described only work continue to depress the as effectively as possible when there is ade- brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- quate contact between the tires and the road uation is over. surface. Please pay special attention to the X To make a full brake application: depress notes on tires, recommended minimum tire the brake pedal with full force. tread depths, etc. (Y page 285). If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a In wintry driving conditions, always use winter pulsing in the brake pedal. tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication Only in this way will the driving safety systems of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a described in this section work as effectively as reminder to take extra care while driving. Safety possible.

BAS (Brake Assist System) ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS the wheels do not lock when you brake. This automatically boosts the braking force, thus allows you to continue steering the vehicle when shortening the stopping distance. braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument Important safety notes cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph tion (Y page 61). (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. G ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you WARNING only brake gently. If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is Important safety notes increased. There is a risk of an accident. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- In an emergency braking situation, depress tion (Y page 61). the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when Braking braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Addition- X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until ally, further driving safety systems are deac- the emergency braking situation is over. tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- ABS prevents the wheels from locking. ding and accidents. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with including driving safety systems, will also Cross-Traffic Assist become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 227) and dis- General information play messages which may be shown in the Y BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a instrument cluster ( page 203). collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS Driving safety systems 63

PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- assisted when braking. uation and be ready to brake. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section G WARNING (Y page 61). BAS PLUS does not react: BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the R Driving Assistance package. to small people, e.g. children For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the Rto animals radar sensor system and the camera system Rto oncoming vehicles must be operational. Rwhen cornering With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all Safety critical situations. There is a risk of an acci- Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time dent. Rthat cross the path of your vehicle Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- uation and be ready to brake. cle can be detected. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical ognition can be impaired. characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else restricted or no longer available. The brake sys- covering the sensors tem is still available with complete brake boost- Rthere is interference by other radar sources ing effect and BAS. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- i Observe the restrictions described in the ple in parking garages "Important safety notes" section Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a (Y page 63). motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Important safety notes Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range G WARNING Recognition by the camera system is also BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify impaired in the event of: objects and complex traffic situations. Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rintervene unnecessarily Rdarkness Rnot intervene Ror if: There is a risk of an accident. - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- of the vehicle uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the - the camera system no longer recognizes a intervention in a non-critical driving situation. pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects G WARNING - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo- the typical outline of a person is not distin- guishable from the background ple, this is especially the case if they are mov- Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these have the configuration and operation of the cases. There is a risk of an accident. radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist

Z 64 Driving safety systems

workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST speeds where there is no visible damage to the PLUS front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the General information configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). Function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autono- To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the mous braking function and adaptive Brake brake force necessary if: Assist. Ryou approach an obstacle, and

Safety COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS such a collision. PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres- If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS sure will be carried out at the last possible detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will moment. be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not When driving at a speed above 20 mph react to the visual and audible collision warning, (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal autonomous braking can be initiated in critical sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION situation. ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a Important safety notes speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and In particular, the detection of obstacles can be 155 mph (250 km/h). impaired if: Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph R (70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to: there is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors R stationary objects in the path of your vehicle, Rthere is snow or heavy rain e.g. stopped or parked vehicles R R there is interference by other radar sources pedestrians in the path of your vehicle R R there are strong radar reflections, for exam- obstacles crossing your path, which move in ple in parking garages the detection range of the sensors and are R recognized by them a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line ing force, preventative passenger protection R ® new vehicles or after a service on the COLLI- measures (PRE-SAFE ) are activated simulta- SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system neously. Observe the notes in the section on breaking- X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the in (Y page 127). emergency braking situation is over. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, ABS prevents the wheels from locking. have the configuration and operation of the BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist tion as usual, if: workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow R speeds where there is no visible damage to the you release the brake pedal. front of the vehicle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacleis detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown. Driving safety systems 65

Activating/deactivating There is a risk of an accident. The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- automatically active after switching on the igni- uation and do not rely solely on the distance tion. warning function. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com- Function Y puter ( page 197). When deactivated, the dis- Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), tance warning function and the autonomous the distance warning function warns you if you braking function are also deactivated. rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermit- If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is tent warning tone will then sound, and the · deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the distance warning lamp will light up in the instru- assistance graphics display. ment cluster. Safety X Brake immediately in order to increase the Distance warning function distance from the vehicle in front. or General information X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do The distance warning function can help you to so. minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a Due to the nature of the system, particularly collision. If the distance warning function complicated but non-critical driving conditions detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will may also cause the system to display a warning. be warned visually and acoustically. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles Important safety notes that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ded period of time. tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61). Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to sta- G WARNING tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parked The distance warning function does not react: vehicles. R to people or animals Autonomous braking function Rto oncoming vehicles If the driver does not react to the distance warn- Rto crossing traffic ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE- Rwhen cornering VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the Thus, the distance warning function cannot autonomous braking function. provide a warning in all critical situations. The autonomous braking function: There is a risk of an accident. Rgives the driver more time to react to critical Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- driving situations uation and be ready to brake. Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident G WARNING The autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: The distance warning function cannot always R clearly identify objects and complex traffic from 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph situations. (105 km/h) for moving objects Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph In such cases, the distance warning function (50 km/h) for stationary objects may: Due to the nature of the system, particularly Rgive an unnecessary warning complicated but non-critical driving conditions Rnot give a warning may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func- tion to intervene.

Z 66 Driving safety systems

If the autonomous braking function requires a G WARNING particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly are activated simultaneously. identify objects and complex traffic situations. Adaptive Brake Assist In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: R General information intervene unnecessarily Rnot intervene i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). There is a risk of an accident. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis- Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Safety tance warning signal can detect obstacles that uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the are in the path of your vehicle for an extended intervention in a non-critical driving situation. period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- G WARNING sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Rto people or animals Assist will automatically increase the braking Rto oncoming vehicles force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. R Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis- to crossing traffic tance in hazardous situations at speeds above Rwhen cornering 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not to assess the traffic situation. intervene in all critical conditions. There is a Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph risk of an accident. (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- been detected as such at least once over the uation and be ready to brake. period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph Due to the nature of the system, particularly (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta- complicated but non-critical driving conditions tionary obstacles. may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a high braking force, preventative passenger pro- malfunction in the radar sensor system, the tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated brake system remains available with full brake simultaneously (Y page 55). boosting effect and BAS. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ® ABS prevents the wheels from locking. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) The brakes will work normally again if: General notes Ryou release the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. tion (Y page 61). Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. Important safety notes If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- the direction desired by the driver, one or more tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61). wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. Driving safety systems 67

ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize flashes in the instrument cluster. the vehicle during braking. If ESP® intervenes: X ® ETS (Electronic Traction System) Do not deactivate ESP under any circumstances. ETS traction control is part of ESP®. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi- necessary when pulling away. vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for road and weather conditions. example if the road surface is slippery on one fety side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer- ECO start/stop function Sa red to the wheel or wheels with traction. The ECO start/stop function switches the Traction control remains active, even if you engine off automatically when the vehicle stops deactivate ESP®. moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® Important safety notes remains in its previously selected status. Exam- ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated tion (Y page 61). when the engine is switched on again. G WARNING Deactivating/activating ESP® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- Important safety notes ing safety systems are deactivated. This You can select between the following states of increases the risk of skidding and an accident. ESP®: Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a RESP® is activated. qualified specialist workshop. RESP® is deactivated. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle G WARNING raised, observe the notes on ESP® ® ® (Y page 282). If you deactivate ESP , ESP no longer sta- If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk continuously, then ESP® is deactivated. of skidding and an accident. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the å Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri- ESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously, bed in the following. ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. ® Observe the information on warning lamps It may be best to deactivate ESP in the follow- (Y page 227) and display messages which may ing situations: be shown in the instrument cluster Rwhen using snow chains (Y page 203). Rin deep snow i Only use wheels with the recommended tire Ron sand or gravel ® sizes. Only then will ESP function properly. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will Characteristics of ESP® otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to General information spin. If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an ® beginning the journey, ESP is automatically extended period with ESP® deactivated. You active. could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Z 68 Driving safety systems

Deactivating/activating ESP® ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on- tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is board computer (Y page 196). a risk of an accident. ® ESP deactivated: Always adapt your driving style to the prevail- The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru- ing road and weather conditions. ment cluster lights up. ESP® activated: If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize å ® The ESP OFF warning lamp in the instru- the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing ment cluster goes out. the brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds Safety ® of about 65 km/h. If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels ® ® start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the ESP trailer stabilization does not work if ESP instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. EBD (electronic brake force distribu- REngine torque is no longer limited and the tion) drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting General information action for better traction on loose surfaces. EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure RTraction control is still activated. on the rear wheels to improve driving stability RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer while braking. available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. Important safety notes RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it ® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- activated if you brake firmly and ESP inter- Y venes. tion for driving safety systems ( page 61). RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is G WARNING ® also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can intervenes. lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the R ® ESP still provides support when you brake risk of skidding and an accident. firmly. You should therefore adapt your driving style ESP® trailer stabilization to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified spe- General information cialist workshop. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to Observe information regarding indicator and ® ® swerve, ESP assists you in this situation. ESP warning lamps (Y page 227) as well as display slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting messages (Y page 204). the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized. Important safety notes ADAPTIVE BRAKE G WARNING i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Y If road and weather conditions are poor, tion ( page 61). trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv- offers increased braking comfort. In addition to Driving safety systems 69 the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has Always apply the brakes yourself and try to Y the HOLD function ( page 162) and hill start take evasive action, provided it is safe to do assist (Y page 130). so.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes, ® PRE-SAFE Brake the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure. General information G WARNING ® PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the ® risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a tify objects and complex traffic conditions. fety collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Sa of collision, you will be warned visually and R acoustically as well as by automatic braking. give an unnecessary warning and then i brake the vehicle Pay attention to the important safety notes R in the "Driving safety systems" section not give a warning or intervene (Y page 61). There is a risk of an accident. PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles Always pay particular attention to the traffic with the Driving Assistance Plus package. situation and be ready to brake, especially if For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the the radar sensor system and the camera system intervention in a non-critical driving situation. must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the G WARNING ® camera system, PRE-SAFE Brake can detect ® obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- extended period of time. tify people, especially if they are moving. In ® In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi- these cases, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot inter- cle can be detected. vene. There is a risk of an accident. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using Always pay particular attention to the traffic typical characteristics such as the body con- situation and be ready to brake, especially if tours and posture of a person standing upright. PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" sec- In order to maintain the appropriate distance to tion“ (Y page 69). the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. Important safety notes G WARNING ® G WARNING PRE-SAFE Brake does not react: PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi- Rto small people, e.g. children cle by a partial application of the brakes if a Rto animals danger of collision is detected. There may be Rto oncoming vehicles a collision unless you brake yourself. Even Rto crossing traffic after subsequent full application of the brakes Rwhen cornering a collision cannot always be avoided, partic- ® ularly when approaching at too high a speed. As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither There is a risk of an accident. give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 70 Driving safety systems

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), uation and be ready to brake. this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone · In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- will then sound and the distance warning ognition can be impaired. lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Recognition by the radar sensor system is also Brake immediately to defuse the situation. impaired if: or X Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Take evasive action provided it is safe to do covering the sensors so. Rthere is interference by other radar sources PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle Rthere are strong radar reflections, for exam- automatically under the following conditions: Safety ple in parking garages Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a belts fastened motorbike and Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately relative to the center of your vehicle 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) Recognition by the camera system is also At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph impaired in the event of: (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun e.g. stopped or parked vehicles being low in the sky Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle R darkness i R If there is an increased risk of a collision, or if: preventive passenger protection measures - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 55). of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front pedestrian as a person due to special cloth- remains and you do not brake, take evasive ing or other objects action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects to the point of full brake application. Automatic - the typical outline of a person is not distin- emergency braking is not performed until imme- guishable from the background diately prior to an imminent accident. Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- have the configuration and operation of the SAFE® Brake at any time by: radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist R workshop.T his also applies to collisions at slow depressing the accelerator pedal further. speeds where there is no visible damage to the Ractivating kickdown. front of the vehicle. Rreleasing the brake pedal. Following damage to the windshield, have the The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended configuration and operation of the camera sys- automatically if: tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. R Function there is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in X To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti- front of your vehicle. vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 197). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Protection against theft 71

STEER CONTROL ATA (anti-theft alarm system) General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: RESP® is deactivated Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a

slippery road surface when you brake heavily Safety Rthe vehicle starts to skid X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or Important safety notes KEYLESS-GO. i Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- is armed after approximately 15 seconds. tion (Y page 61). X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the No steering support is provided by STEER CON- SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. TROL, if: or R ESP® is malfunctioning. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rthe lighting is faulty. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the Power steering will, however, continue to func- alarm system is armed and you open: tion. Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Protection against theft Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood Immobilizer X To switch the alarm off with the Smart- The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from Key: press the % or & button on the being started without the correct SmartKey. SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- ignition off and open the driver's door. tion lock. X X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey left inside the vehicle. must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when or you start the engine. X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- In the event that the engine cannot be started board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi- (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys- cle. tem is not operational. Contact an authorized The alarm is switched off. Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or The alarm is not switched off, even if you close 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). the open door that triggered it, for example.

Z 72 Protection against theft

i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is

Safety available. SmartKey 73

SmartKey SmartKey functions Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: : & To lock the vehicle ; F To unlock the trunk lid R release the parking brake. = % To unlock the vehicle R shifting the automatic transmission out of X To unlock centrally: press the % button. park position P If you do not open the vehicle within approx- RStart the engine. imately 40 seconds of unlocking: There is a risk of an accident and injury. Rthe vehicle is locked again. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Ranti-theft protection is reactivated. Opening and closing SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X To lock centrally: press the & button. leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: reach of children. Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid G WARNING Rthe fuel filler flap If you attach heavy or large objects to the The turn signals flash once when unlocking and SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- three times when locking. tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible cause the engine to be switched off. There is a signal can be activated and deactivated using risk of an accident. the on-board computer (Y page 200). Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before on if it is activated in the on-board computer inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. (Y page 199).

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control KEYLESS-GO function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin- General notes ity of powerful electrical installations. Bear in mind that the engine can be started by Do not keep the SmartKey: any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- Y Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone LESS-GO key in the vehicle ( page 130). or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Locking/unlocking centrally Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using This can affect the functionality of the Smart- KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the Key. SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

Z 74 SmartKey

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven- Deactivating and activating tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an & button on the SmartKey. extended period of time, you can deactivate the When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The the distance between the SmartKey and the cor- SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby responding door handle must not be greater conserving battery power. For the purposes of than 3 ft (1 m). activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. A check which periodically establishes a radio X To deactivate: & connection between the vehicle and the Smart- press the button on the Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in SmartKey twice in rapid succession. the vehicle. This occurs, for example: The battery check lamp of the SmartKey (Y page 76) flashes twice briefly and lights Rwhen the external door handles are touched up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. Rwhen starting the engine X To activate: press any button on the Smart- Rwhile the vehicle is in motion Key. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again.

Opening and closing Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur- is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel face of the door handle. alone. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- X To change the setting: simultaneously press face :. the % and & buttons on the SmartKey X Convenience closing feature: for approximately six seconds until the bat- touch Y recessed sensor surface ; for an extended tery check lamp flashes twice ( page 76). period. If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button.

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on the trunk lid. The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid. SmartKey 75

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- For further information about: lows: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80) X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner Runlocking the trunk (Y page 81) surface of the door handle on the driver's Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 80) door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface Inserting the mechanical key of the front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor X Push mechanical key ; completely into the surface on one of the door handles. SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice SmartKey battery (Y page 76). Important safety notes

G WARNING Mechanical key Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- General notes ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal If the vehicle can no longer be locked or injury. unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If Opening and closing If you use the mechanical key to unlock and a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti- immediately. theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71). H Environmental note If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical Batteries contain dangerous key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto- substances. It is against the matically. law to dispose of them with X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the the household rubbish. They SmartKey into the ignition lock. must be collected separately and recycled to protect the Removing the mechanical key environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In Cal- X : Push release catch in the direction of the ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ arrow and at the same time remove mechan- HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. ical key ; from the SmartKey.

Z 76 SmartKey

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the tery compartment cover : opens. Do not batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work- hold battery compartment cover : closed shop. while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. Checking the battery

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your X Press the & or % button. palm until battery = falls out. The battery is working properly if battery X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- check lamp : lights up briefly. minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to The battery is discharged if battery check do so. lamp : does not light up briefly. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is Opening and closing X Change the battery (Y page 76). free of lint, grease and other contaminants. If the SmartKey battery is checked within the X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing cover : into the housing and then press to the & or % button: close it. Rlocks or X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey Runlocks the vehicle (Y page 75). X i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on cialist workshop. the vehicle.

Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75).

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until bat- SmartKey 77

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary the SmartKey. (Y page 76). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). KEYLESS-GO. Opening and closing The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary (Y page 76). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 78 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 276). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using KEYLESS- X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. GO. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Key. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Opening and closing You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Important safety notes reach of children. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. ! The side windows will not open/close if the R battery is discharged or if the side windows get out and disrupt traffic. have iced up. It will then not be possible to Roperate the vehicle's equipment. close the door. Do not attempt to force the Additionally, children could set the vehicle in door closed. You could otherwise damage the motion if, for example, they: door or the side window. Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Doors 79

You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is X To unlock a front door: ; pull door handle . unlocked. Locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a front door: pull door handle ;. Automatic locking feature X To unlock a rear door: pull up locking knob :. The door is unlocked and can be opened. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.

When a door is opened, the side window on that Opening and closing side opens slightly. When the door is closed, the side window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside X To deactivate: press and hold button : for You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from about five seconds until a tone sounds. the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore lock yourself out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X To unlock: press button :. X You can also switch the automatic locking func- To lock: press button ;. tion on and off using the on-board computer If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks. (Y page 200). Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. If the vehicle has been locked from the outside, it cannot be centrally unlocked from the inside.

Z 80 Trunk

Unlocking/locking the driver's door The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be using the mechanical key found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 317). i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using You should preferably place luggage or loads in the mechanical key, begin by pressing the the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines locking button for the interior locking mech- (Y page 240). anism while the driver's door is open. Then Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You lock the driver's door using the mechanical could otherwise lock yourself out. key. The trunk lid can be: Ropened and closed manually from outside Ropened automatically from inside Rlocked separately Ropened with the emergency release button Runlocked with the mechanical key

Opening/closing from outside Opening

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-

Opening and closing clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71).

Trunk X Press the % button on the SmartKey . Important safety notes X Pull handle :. G WARNING X Raise the trunk lid. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust Closing gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. Trunk 81

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. X Close the trunk lid. X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the & X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey button on the SmartKey (Y page 73) or with (Y page 75). KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and will open again.

Opening automatically from inside Important safety notes

G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid trunk lid is open when the engine is running, lock as far as it will go. especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from posi- risk of poisoning. tion 1 to position 2. X Remove the mechanical key. Always switch off the engine before opening X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. Opening and closing Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) Opening ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart- Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 71). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 75). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid X Pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : lock as far as it will go. until the trunk lid opens. You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 317).

Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened.

Z 82 Side windows

X Turn the mechanical key from position 1 Make sure that nobody touches the side win- counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi- dow during the opening procedure. If some- tion 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid handle. body becomes trapped, release the switch or The trunk is unlocked. pull the switch to close the side window again. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. G WARNING X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey While closing the side windows, body parts in (Y page 75). the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the Trunk emergency release body are in the closing area. If somebody You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi- becomes trapped, release the switch or press cle with the emergency release button. the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side

Opening and closing windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. Side window reversing feature The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi- The side windows are equipped with an auto- cle is stationary or while driving. matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks The trunk lid emergency release does not open or restricts a side window during the closing the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or process, the side window opens again automat- discharged. ically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for your Trunk lid emergency release light: attentiveness when closing a side window. R Emergency release button : flashes for G 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. WARNING REmergency release button : flashes for The reversing feature does not react: 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers R Side windows over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Important safety notes Rduring resetting G WARNING Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic reversing While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side win- This means that the reversing feature cannot dow and the door frame as the side window prevent someone being trapped in these sit- moves. There is a risk of injury. uations. There is a risk of injury. Side windows 83

Make sure that no body parts are in close point of resistance in the relevant direction. You proximity during the closing procedure. If can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. someone becomes trapped, press the switch You can continue to operate the side windows to open the side window again. after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger Opening and closing the side win- door is opened. dows When the override feature for the side windows is activated, the side windows cannot be oper- The switches for all side windows are located on ated from the rear (Y page 61). the driver's door. There is also a switch on the front-passenger door as well as on the doors in the rear compartment on the left and right-hand Opening and closing all side windows sides for the respective side window. The switches on the driver's door take prece- Using the switch on the center console dence. G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If Opening and closing somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch down to open the side window again.

You can use the switch on the center console to : Front left close all side windows simultaneously. ; Front right X Open the cover in the lower center console. = Rear right The switch for all side windows is under the ? Rear left cover. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull and hold the corresponding switch. X To close fully: pull the corresponding switch beyond the pressure point. Automatic operation is started. X To open all side windows: : X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ press switch pull the corresponding switch again. to the point of resistance. X To open all side windows fully: press You can start automatic operation when open- switch : beyond the point of resistance. ing and closing the front door windows and X : when opening the rear door windows. To do so, To close all side windows: pull switch . briefly press or pull the switch to beyond the

Z 84 Side windows

Using the SmartKey

G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

You can use the SmartKey to open or close all X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the side windows simultaneously. The SmartKey door handle until the side windows are fully must be near the door handle. closed. X Close the soft top (Y page 86). i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor X Open the trunk partition (Y page 91). surface :. X To open all side windows: press the % X To interrupt convenience closing: release button on the SmartKey until the side win- recessed sensor surface : on the door han- dows are fully opened. dle. X To interrupt the opening procedure: release the % button. Opening and closing X To close all side windows: press the & Resetting the side windows button on the SmartKey until the side windows are fully closed. If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X To interrupt the closing procedure: release X the & button. Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door G WARNING control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 83). When using the convenience closing feature, X Hold the switch for an additional second. parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area when a side window is being closed. If the side window opens again slightly: There is a risk of injury. X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on Observe the complete closing procedure the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 83). when the convenience closing feature is oper- X Hold the switch for an additional second. ating. Make sure that no body parts are in X close proximity during the closing procedure. If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: steps above again. X Release recessed sensor surface on the door handle. X Immediately pull and hold the door handle and keep the door handle pulled. The side windows open. With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side windows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Soft top 85

Problems with the side windows G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be X Remove the objects. closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. Opening and closing If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Soft top ! When opening and closing the soft top, make sure that: Important safety notes Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, as the G WARNING soft top swings upwards. Rthe trunk partition is closed. If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunk soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short partition. time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by the pectedly and may cause you or others to be load. trapped. There is a risk of injury. Rthe trunk lid is closed. Always open or close the soft top completely. Rthere are no objects on the soft-top compartment cover ! Never sit on the soft-top compartment Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen. cover or stow heavy objects there. You will You could otherwise damage the soft top, otherwise damage the soft top and soft-top trunk and other parts of the vehicle. compartment cover of the vehicle. Vehicle height when opening/closing the soft top (Y page 317).

Z 86 Soft top

Make sure that the soft top is dry and clean Opening and closing before closing it. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk. X Make sure that the trunk partition is closed Y You can open or close the soft top: ( page 91). X Close the trunk lid. Rwhen the vehicle is stationary or X 2 R Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition when you do not exceed a speed of 25 mph lock. (40 km/h) X Open the cover in the lower center console. If there is a strong head wind, it may not be possible to close the soft top fully. In this case, reduce speed or stop in order to close the soft top fully. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only open or close the soft top when the vehicle is stationary. If the soft top does not open or close fully, the soft-top hydraulics are depressurized and the soft top is lowered: Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the ignition is switched on Rimmediately if the ignition is switched off X To open: pull soft-top switch : until the entire soft top is stowed away in the trunk. Opening and closing Opening/closing with the soft top The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. switch If, when opening, you drive at speeds above Important safety notes 25 mph (40 km/h), the opening procedure is stopped. The Open/Close Convertible G WARNING Top Completely message appears in the multifunction display. In order to open the When opening or closing the soft top, there is soft top fully, reduce your speed again to a risk that parts of the body could become below 25 mph (40 km/h) and pull the soft-top trapped by moving parts such as the roof switch again. mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win- X To close: press and hold soft-top switch : dows. There is a risk of injury. until the soft top is fully closed. Convertible Top in Operation When opening or closing the roof, make sure The message appears in the multifunction display. that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of If, when closing, you drive at speeds above moving parts. Release the switch if somebody 25 mph (40 km/h), the opening procedure is becomes trapped. stopped. The Open/Close Convertible Top Completely message appears in the G WARNING multifunction display. In order to close the If the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph soft top fully, reduce your speed again to below 25 mph (40 km/h) and press the soft- (40 km/h) the soft top stops during the open- top switch again. ing or closing procedure. This impairs your view to the rear. There is a risk of an accident. Reduce your speed to below 25 mph (40 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Press or pull the soft-top switch again in order to open or close the soft top fully. Soft top 87

Opening/closing using the SmartKey Ris the trunk lid closed? Ris the on-board voltage sufficient? Important safety notes Start the engine if necessary. G WARNING If automatic operation still does not work, the soft top can be closed manually. When opening or closing the soft top, there is To carry out this work, you will need the assis- a risk that parts of the body could become tance of another person. trapped by moving parts such as the roof mechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win- Closing the soft top dows. There is a risk of injury. X Apply the parking brake. When opening or closing the roof, make sure X Open the side windows. that no parts of the body are in the vicinity of X Lower the head restraints automatically moving parts. Release the switch if somebody (Y page 98) or manually (Y page 98). becomes trapped. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Open the trunk. Opening and closing X Take the two straps out of the vehicle tool kit Y The SmartKey must be near the door handle. ( page 270). X Take the hex-socket wrench out of the Oper- X To open: press the % button in the Smart- ator's Manual wallet and keep it with you. Key until the soft top is completely opened. The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. The Opening and closing seat ventilation is switched on. The rear side windows open. X To close: press the & button in the Smart- Key until the soft top is completely closed. The Convertible Top in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. The soft top and the side windows close.

Closing the soft top manually X Turn rotary catch : counter-clockwise and Important safety notes fold cover ; down.

G WARNING Closing the soft top manually is a complex, technically challenging procedure which can also be physically demanding. You or others can become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Where possible, have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the soft top cannot be closed automatically, check the following points: Ris the trunk partition engaged (Y page 91)? Rare the head restraints on the rear bench seats extended?

Z 88 Soft top

X Insert Allen key = into valve screw ? on the The soft-top compartment hinges are on the hydraulic pump. right-hand and left-hand side in the gap between X Turn valve screw ? of the hydraulic pump the lid of the soft-top compartment and the with Allen key = counter-clockwise a full trunk seal. turn. X Move both levers C of soft-top compartment hinges forwards beyond the detent position on both sides.

X On both sides of the trunk, tear paneling A along the perforation in the direction of the arrow. X On both sides, pull the straps through behind the soft-top compartment hinges in the direction of the arrow D. Opening and closing X Route the straps through the created loops.

X Pull out catch B as far as possible on both sides and turn it counter-clockwise about a quarter turn. X Make sure catch B is not drawn in again. X Pull the straps between the soft-top compart- Otherwise, pull out catch B again as far as ment hinges and the soft-top compartment. possible and turn it counter-clockwise about i Do not pull the straps as long as the trunk is a quarter turn. open. Soft top 89

X Place straps E on the soft-top compartment X One person stands on the right-hand side and lid. the other person on the left-hand side of the i Take the hex-socket wrench and the Smart- vehicle. Key out of the trunk if necessary. You can only X Grip the soft-top compartment with one hand access the trunk again once you have fully as illustrated. closed the soft top manually. X Use the other hand to support yourself on the X Make sure that catch B is not pulled again. edge of the trunk lid as illustrated. Otherwise, pull out catch B again as far as X Lift soft-top compartment lid F up as far as it possible and turn it counter-clockwise about will go. In doing so, pull soft-top compartment a quarter turn. cover F evenly to the rear, applying constant X Close the trunk lid. force. G ! The trunk lid must be closed for the next WARNING steps. The soft top compartment cover could If anywhere other than the indicated gripping otherwise collide with the trunk lid. points is gripped, you or others can become trapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury. Take off jewelry and watches. Only hold the indicated gripping points. Do not reach between the cover halves and into the hinges. Opening and closing

X Each person takes a strap. X Pulling with force, simultaneously lift out the cover of the soft-top compartment up and out by the straps in the direction of the arrow. G WARNING X Reach under the tip of soft top G in the soft- If anywhere other than the indicated gripping top compartment from the right-hand and points is gripped, you or others can become left-hand sides. trapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury. Take off jewelry and watches. Only hold the indicated gripping points. Do not reach between the cover halves and into the hinges.

X Lift the soft top out of the soft-top compartment and guide it forwards in the direction of the arrow onto windshield frame H.

Z 90 Soft top

I To open J To lock X Pull off the cover of the roof lock behind the overhead control panel. X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock. X Turn the Allen key clockwise I as far as it will go. ! During the following step, make sure that the Allen key is turned counter-clockwise as

Opening and closing far as it will go. Otherwise, the soft top may not be properly locked. X X Turn Allen key J counter-clockwise as far as With your hand flat, press down the material it will go. tensioning frame until it rests on soft-top sup- The soft top is now pre-locked on the wind- port M of the soft-top compartment lid. shield frame. X With your hand flat, press the soft-top compartment cover forwards/downwards on both sides simultaneously until it engages in the guide. Apply your hands to the points indicated with arrows. At the same time, press the material tensioning frame gently downwards with your flat hand.

X Move material tensioning frame K to an upright position. ! Make sure the soft-top compartment cover does not collide with the material tensioning frame during the following step. X Lower soft-top compartment lid L. X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock. X Turn Allen key N counter-wise as far as it will go. X Have the soft-top mechanism repaired immediately at a specialist workshop. Soft top 91 i Press the soft-top compartment lid again if could obstruct the trunk partition or cause the trunk lid cannot be opened. damage to the open soft top. Rmake sure that the cargo does not push the ! Do not under any circumstances open the trunk partition upwards. trunk lid with the emergency key. You could otherwise damage the trunk lid and the soft- The soft top can only be opened when the trunk top compartment cover. partition is closed. The trunk partition can be used to cover luggage and loads in the trunk. Relocking the soft top Opening and closing Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unexpectedly and may cause you or others to be trapped. There is a risk of injury. Always open or close the soft top completely.

The soft top is not locked if: R Convertible Top in Operation Opening and closing the mes- X sage appears in the multifunction display. To close: pull trunk partition : by the handle in the direction of the arrow until it rests on Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten seconds the sides of the trunk. when pulling away or while driving. Trunk partition : finishes closing automatically. Locking X To open: push trunk partition : against the You can lock the soft top again if it is not locked direction of the arrow by the handle. fully. Trunk partition : finishes opening automatically. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Brackets for the wind screen lock. G WARNING X Press the soft-top switch (Y page 86). If you use the wind screen in darkness or in other conditions offering poor visibility, your Trunk partition view to the rear is further impaired. There is a risk of an accident. General notes Only use the wind screen when visibility conditions are good. ! In order to avoid damaging the soft top or stowed loads, please adhere to the following ! while the soft top is open: Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wind screens which have been tested and Rwhen the trunk partition is open, do not approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This place any objects in or behind the net on helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. the side that are too long. These objects ! Observe the backrest position of the front seats if the wind screen is installed, since the

Z 92 Soft top

backrest could collide with the wind screen Extending AIRCAP here.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition The wind screen protects against wind when lock. driving with the soft top open. It is secured X above the rear bench seats. For this reason, only Open the cover in the lower center console. the driver and the front passenger can travel in X Press AIRCAP button :. the vehicle when the wind screen is installed. The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP button light up. X When installing the wind screen, use lateral brackets :. Observe the manufacturer's installation Opening and closing instructions.

AIRCAP Important safety notes

G WARNING When retracting the AIRCAP, persons could become caught in the moving mechanism. Wind deflector ; extends. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that persons do not hold onto the upper frame of the windshield and do not touch the AIRCAP wind deflector.

With AIRCAP, four people can travel comfortably with the soft top open. AIRCAP reduces the draft for the driver and passengers in both the front and the rear compartment in a vehicle with the soft top down. AIRCAP has the following components: Ra wind deflector between the windshield and the soft top The head restraints on the rear bench seats and Ran AIRCAP wind screen between the two head AIRCAP wind screen = move to the center restraints on the rear bench seat position simultaneously. You can open or close AIRCAP either when the When a seat belt in the rear compartment is vehicle is stationary or when driving up to a fastened, the head restraints on the rear bench speed of 100 mph (160 km/h). seats and AIRCAP wind screen = move to the upper position. Soft top 93

If you park your vehicle with the soft top down Removing and remove the SmartKey, the wind deflector and the head restraints in the rear compartment retract automatically. When you start the engine again, the wind deflector and the head restraints in the rear compartment extend again automatically. AIRCAP cannot be extended or retracted if the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 100 mph (160 km/h).

Retracting AIRCAP X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use the 4 mm Allen key to turn the bolts on X Open the cover in the lower center console. both sides counter-clockwise by about 90° X Press AIRCAP button :. and loosen them. X Pull the bolts out of the brackets on the head The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP button restraints. go out. Wind deflector ; retracts. The head restraints on the rear bench seats and AIRCAP wind screen = move to the lowest position simultaneously.

If there are passengers wearing seat belts in the Opening and closing rear compartment, the head restraints on the rear bench seats and the AIRCAP wind screen remain in the upper position.

Retracting the head restraints on the rear bench seats from the driver's seat To improve the rear view, you can retract the head restraints on the rear bench seats individ- X Pull the AIRCAP wind screen out of the guide ually (Y page 98). The wind deflector remains rails in the direction of the arrow. Make sure in its current position. that you pull the AIRCAP wind screen forwards slightly when doing so.

Installing and removing the AIRCAP Installing wind screen Preparation You will need a 4 mm Allen key to install/remove the AIRCAP wind screen. Before installing or removing the AIRCAP wind screen: X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the folding roof fully (Y page 86). X Extend the head restraints in the rear compartment fully (Y page 98). X Keeping the AIRCAP wind screen horizontal, guide it into the slot between the head

Z 94 Soft top

restraints in the direction of the arrow with both racks straight down. X Push the AIRCAP wind screen down until the bolts are at the same height as the brackets on the head restraints. X Insert the bolts into the brackets on both sides. X Tighten the bolts with the 4 mm Allen key until they engage. The markings on the bolts are vertical. Opening and closing Soft top 95

Problems with the soft top

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The soft top will not open The ignition is not switched on. or close. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80). The trunk partition is not closed. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 91). The roll bars have been deployed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The head restraints in the rear compartment do not retract automatically. X Lower the head restraints in the rear compartment manually (Y page 98). The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.

X Close the soft top manually if necessary (Y page 87). Opening and closing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

Z 96 Seats

Correct driver's seat position Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. Ryou should have a good overview of traffic G WARNING conditions. You could lose control of your vehicle if you do Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body the following while driving: and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area. Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Further related subjects: R Y Rfasten the seat belt Electrical seat adjustment ( page 97) RAdjusting the steering wheel (Y page 103) There is a risk of an accident. RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 43). Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt mirrors (Y page 105). before starting the engine. RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings using the memory function (Y page 108).

Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is no

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the possible. event of an accident or when braking. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat Always drive with the head restraints instal- cushion. led. Before driving off, make sure for every Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you vehicle occupant that the center of the head can depress the pedals properly. restraint supports the back of the head at Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level about eye level. by the center of the head restraint. R Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" you can hold the steering wheel with your Y arms slightly bent. ( page 45) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 57). Ryou can move your legs freely. Seats 97

G WARNING als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when mov- Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, ing the seats back. There is a risk that the steering wheel or mirrors seats and/or the objects could be damaged. R fasten the seat belt i The head restraints in the front seats are There is a risk of an accident. installed with the NECK-PRO system Y Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- ( page 55). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt seats. before starting the engine. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and Adjusting the seats thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.

G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the : Head restraint height seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. ; Seat cushion angle = Seat height Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one

? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seats, steering wheel and mirrors has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. A Backrest angle ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front- heating, observe the following information: passenger seat is in an unfavorable position, Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If it is moved to a better position. liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as i You can store the seat settings using the soon as possible. memory function (Y page 108). R if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not i switch on the seat heating. The seat heat- Vehicles with the through-loading feature: if ing should also not be used to dry the seats. you fold down a rear seat backrest, the Rclean the seat covers as recommended; respective front seat is moved forwards see "Interior care". slightly if necessary. This prevents the seats from colliding. Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materi-

Z 98 Seats

Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraint height electrically Important safety notes

G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt X before starting the engine. Slide switch for head restraint height adjustment : up or down in the direction of the arrow. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not Adjusting the rear head restraints adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the

Seats, steering wheel andheight mirrors and angle of the head restraints to the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition correct position. lock (Y page 128). Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the X To lower: press button :. head restraint so that it is as close as possible to The head restraints move to the lowest posi- your head. tion. Observe the important safety notes regarding X To extend: press button : again. the seats (Y page 96). The head restraints only move into the central position if AIRCAP is activated and no rear seat belt has been fastened. i Please see further information on AIRCAP (Y page 92).

Manually lowering the rear head restraints If the head restraints in the rear compartment are in the upper position, the soft top cannot be closed fully. Seats 99

Lower the head restraints in the rear compart- Folding the front seat backrests ment manually if: forward/back Rthe head restraint electronics are malfunctioning. Important safety notes R the opening or closing procedure of the soft G top is interrupted, leaving the soft top com- WARNING partment cover open. If the backrest is not engaged, it could fold forwards during a braking maneuver or in the event of an accident, for example. The seat backrest will then push the vehicle occupant against the seat belt. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. There is an increased risk of injury. Before each journey, make sure that the backrest engages fully as described.

G WARNING Cover ; can only be released if: You could lose control of your vehicle if you do Rthe soft top is interrupted during the opening the following while driving: or closing procedure. Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or Rthe soft top compartment cover is left open. mirrors X Push the mechanical key into two openings : between the head restraints until Rfasten the seat belt cover ; releases. There is a risk of an accident. X Take off cover ;. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirrors and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine.

G WARNING Seats, steering wheel and mirrors When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

X Lowering the head restraints: turn thumbwheel : in the direction of the front seats.

Z 100 Seats

Folding the seat backrest forward You can adjust the contour of the front seat individually so as to provide optimum support for your back and sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

The seat moves forwards if you have folded the backrest forwards and the seat is in the rear half of the range. This makes it easier for passengers to get into and out of the rear compartment. The head restraint is lowered simultaneously. X Pull seat release handle : forwards and fold the backrest forwards as far as it will go. The seat automatically moves to the foremost : To raise the backrest contour position and the head restraint is lowered. ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour Folding the seat backrest back ? To harden the backrest contour X Swing back the seat backrest. You can adjust the contour of the front seat The seat moves automatically to the stored backrests individually to provide optimum sup- position. port for your back.

Adjusting the multicontour seat Seat heating and seat ventilation

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching the seat heating on/off

G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on : To adjust the thigh cushion repeatedly. ; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar region = To adjust the backrest contour in the upper back region ? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat backrest Seats 101

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the soft top and the rear side windows with the SmartKey (Y page 87). The Driver's and front-passenger seat seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten d mirrors minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the wheel an ignition lock (Y page 128). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Seats, steering

Driver's and front-passenger seat The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected.

Z 102 Steering wheel

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating or seat The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ventilation has switched ers are switched on. off prematurely or can- X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the not be switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually.

AIRSCARF You can use the adjustable fins on the head restraint to adjust the height of the current of air G WARNING blown out according to your height. When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air Make sure that no objects are covering the intake grille on the rear of the driver's-side/ can flow from the vents in the head restraints. front-passenger seat backrest. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. i The blower continues running for seven seconds to cool down the heating elements. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF may switch off.

Steering wheel Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving:

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Driver's and front-passenger seat Rfasten the seat belt The AIRSCARF function warms the head and There is a risk of an accident. neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. The warm air flows out of the holes in the head Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- restraints. ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt The three red indicator lamps in the button indi- before starting the engine. cate the heating level you have selected. G X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 WARNING in the ignition lock. Children could injure themselves if they X To switch on: press button :. adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of Three red indicator lamps in the button light injury. up. The blower starts up after a preheating When leaving the vehicle, always take the phase of seven seconds. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Press button : repeatedly until the desired leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. Steering wheel 103

The electrically adjustable steering wheel can Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition and open the driver's door, the the ignition lock. steering wheel heating is deactivated. i The steering wheel heating may switch off temporarily if: Adjusting the steering wheel Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior is above 86 ‡ (30 †) Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is above 95 ‡ (35 †). Indicator lamp = remains on.

: To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104) RStoring settings (Y page 108)

Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

Z 104 Steering wheel

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum- ing has switched off pre- ers are switched on. maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating will switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. Important safety notes G The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in WARNING and out of your vehicle easier. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts You can activate and deactivate the EASY- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer occupants – particularly children – could (Y page 200). become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- Position of the steering wheel when the ing adjustments, make sure that no one has EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active any body parts in the sweep of the steering The steering wheel swings upwards when you: wheel. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; there is a risk of entrapment by the steering KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 must be in Vehicles with a memory function: if there is a the ignition lock (Y page 128). risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel,

Seats, steering wheel andyou mirrors can also one of the memory function posi- i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it tion buttons. The adjustment process is stop- has not already reached the upper stop. ped. G WARNING Position of the steering wheel for driving If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly The steering wheel is moved to the last selected when unattended. There is a risk of injury. position when: When leaving the vehicle, always take the Rthe driver's door is closed SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Rwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. button once or G WARNING Rwith the SmartKey: you insert the SmartKey If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT into the ignition lock feature is making adjustments, you could lose When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is also control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an automatically moved to the previously set posi- accident. tion. Mirrors 105

The last position of the steering wheel is stored Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- when you switch off the ignition or when you ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt store the setting with the memory function (Y page 108). before starting the engine. G Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig- side reduces the size of the image. Visible gered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. objects are actually closer than they appear. This occurs irrespective of the position of the This means that you could misjudge the dis- SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas- tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci- The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only dent. operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is For this reason, always make sure of the activated in the on-board computer actual distance from the road users traveling (Y page 200). behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Mirrors Rear-view mirror

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Press button : for the left-hand exterior mirror or button ; for the right-hand exterior Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for- mirror. wards or back. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some Exterior mirrors time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator Adjusting the exterior mirrors lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button = up, down, or to G WARNING the left or right until you have adjusted the You could lose control of your vehicle if you do exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic condi- the following while driving: tions. R adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field steering wheel or mirrors of vision. Rfasten the seat belt After the engine has been started, the exterior There is a risk of an accident. mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside

Z 106 Mirrors

temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as ten minutes. soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. R i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors the exterior mirrors fold out again automati- manually by switching on the rear window cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and defroster. then open the driver's or front-passenger door. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in electrically manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button

d mirrors until you hear a click and then the mirrors engage in position (Y page 106). The mirror housing is engaged again and you X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual ignition lock (Y page 128). (Y page 105). X Briefly press button :. wheel an Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are Automatic anti-glare mirrors always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. G WARNING i If you are driving faster than 30 mph Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte- matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte rior mirrors. is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- Seats, steering Setting the exterior mirrors piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. If the battery has been disconnected or com- There is a risk of injury. pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be If you come into contact with the electrolyte, reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not observe the following: fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when R locking" function in the on-board computer Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin (Y page 201). immediately with water. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of lock (Y page 128). your eyes thoroughly with clean water. X Briefly press button :. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not Folding the exterior mirrors in or out induce vomiting. automatically RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your This function is only available in Canada. skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is attention immediately. activated in the on-board computer (Y page 201): Mirrors 107

X RImmediately change out of clothing which Engage reverse gear. has come into contact with electrolyte. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical X Use adjustment button = to adjust the exte- attention immediately. rior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on The parking position is stored. the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare i mode if the following conditions are met simul- If you shift the transmission to another posi- taneously: tion, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position. Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sen- Using the memory button sor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if You can store the parking position of the exte- reverse gear is engaged. rior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not be engaged. Parking position for the exterior mir- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition ror on the front-passenger side lock (Y page 128). X With the exterior mirror on the front- Setting and storing the parking position passenger side activated, use adjustment button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the You can position the front-passenger side exte- exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb rior mirror in such a way that you can see the should be visible. rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage X Press memory button M ? and one of the reverse gear. You can store this position. arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. Using reverse gear The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat these steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ting X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side using button ;. X Engage reverse gear. : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror The exterior mirror on the front-passenger ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior side moves to the stored parking position. mirror The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side = Adjustment button moves back to its original position: ? Memory button M Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph X Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to (15 km/h) position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the on the driver's side front-passenger side.

Z 108 Memory function

Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. X Adjust the seat (Y page 97). G WARNING X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel Children could become trapped if they acti- (Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors Y vate the memory function, particularly when ( page 105). X unattended. There is a risk of injury. Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three When leaving the vehicle, always take the seconds. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The settings are stored in the selected preset leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- Calling up a stored setting pants – particularly children – could become X Press and hold the relevant storage position trapped. There is a risk of injury. button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel While the memory function is making adjust- and exterior mirrors are in the stored position. ments, make sure that no one has any body i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon parts in the sweep of the seat or steering as you release the storage position button. wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors diately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped.

The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition lock. With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. Exterior lighting 109

Exterior lighting If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. General notes X Turn the light switch to Ã. For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom- The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand- mends that you drive with the lights switched on ing lamps) switches off automatically if you: even during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicle Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock is equipped with special daytime running lamps. R In some countries, operation of the headlamps open the driver's door with the SmartKey in varies due to legal requirements and self- position 0 in the ignition lock imposed obligations. Automatic headlamp mode If you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the daytime running lamps G WARNING function in the on-board computer When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- Y ( page 199). beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other Setting the exterior lighting causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Setting options accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to Exterior lighting can be set using: L. Rthe light switch Rthe combination switch (Y page 110) The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. Rthe on-board computer (Y page 199) The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Light switch Ã is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to Operation the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off auto-

matically depending on the brightness of the Lights and windshield wipers ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the Daytime Running Lights function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambi- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps ent light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: 2 X Right-hand standing lamps turn the light switch to Ã. 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting Canada only: 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled The daytime running lamps improve the visibility by the light sensor of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run- 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps ning lamps function is required by law in Can- B R Rear fog lamp ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/

Z 110 Exterior lighting

low-beam headlamps go out after three X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the minutes. SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta- start the engine. tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. light switch to T, the daytime running lamps X Press the R button. and parking lamps switch on. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- If the engine is running and you turn the light ment cluster lights up. switch to L, the manual settings take prec- X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the edence over the daytime running lamps. R button. USA only: The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru- The daytime running lamps improve the visibility ment cluster goes out. of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be Parking lamps switched on using the on-board computer ! Y If the battery charge is very low, the parking ( page 199). lamps or standing lamps are automatically If the engine is running and you turn the light switched off to enable the next engine start. switch to T or L, the manual settings Always park your vehicle safely and suffi- take precedence over the daytime running ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoid lamps. using the parking lamps T over a period of several hours. If possible, switch on the right- Low-beam headlamps hand X or left-hand W standing lamp. G WARNING X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- The green T indicator lamp in the instru- beam headlamps may not be switched on ment cluster lights up. automatically if there is fog, snow or other Standing lamps causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. accident. X To switch on the standing lamps: the In such situations, turn the light switch to SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or L. it should be in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is Lights and windshield wipers the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head- vehicle). lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. Combination switch X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Exterior lighting 111

= High-beam flasher X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: ? Turn signal, left press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a X To indicate briefly: press the combination turn signal using the combination switch, only switch briefly to the pressure point in the the turn signal lamp on the corresponding direction of arrow ; or ?. side of the vehicle will flash. The corresponding turn signal flashes three X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: times. press button :. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of The hazard warning lamps automatically switch arrow ; or ?. on if: R X To switch on the high-beam headlamps an air bag is deployed or R manually: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed the ignition lock or start the engine. of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn the light switch to L or Ã. The hazard warning lamps switch off automati- X cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli- L the light switch to . cation. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the In the Ã position, the high-beam head- ignition is switched off. lamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instru- Cornering light function ment cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: direction you are turning, enabling better visi- move the combination switch back to its nor- bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be mal position. activated when the low-beam headlamps are K The blue indicator lamp in the instru- switched on. ment cluster goes out. Active: Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if R Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto- if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph matically controls activation and deactivation of (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or Lights and windshield wipers the high-beam headlamps (Y page 111). turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn Hazard warning lamps the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your

Z 112 Exterior lighting

vehicle, and consequently switches the head- Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist lamps from high beam to low beam. on/off The system automatically adapts the low-beam X headlamp range depending on the distance to To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. the other vehicle. Once the system no longer X Press the combination switch beyond the detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. high-beam headlamps. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction The system's optical sensor is located behind display lights up when it is dark and the light the windshield near the overhead control panel. sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approx- Important safety notes imately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically G WARNING depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians users have been detected: Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists The high-beam headlamps are switched on R automatically. The K indicator lamp in the whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier instrument cluster also lights up. In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist If you are driving at speeds below approx- may fail to recognize other road users that imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have lights, or may recognize them too late. In have been detected or the roads are ade- this or similar situations, the automatic high- quately lit: beam headlamps will not be deactivated or The high-beam headlamps are switched off activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci- automatically. The K indicator lamp in the _ dent. instrument cluster goes out. The indicator lamp in the multifunction display Always carefully observe the traffic conditions remains lit. and switch off the high-beam headlamps in X To switch off: move the combination switch good time. back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into The _ indicator lamp in the instrument

Lights and windshield wipers account road, weather or traffic conditions. cluster goes out. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. Headlamps fogged up on the inside In particular, the detection of obstacles can be Certain climatic and physical conditions may restricted if there is: cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or moisture does not affect the functionality of the snow headlamp. Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Replacing bulbs 113

Interior lighting Replacing bulbs Overview of interior lighting Important safety notes G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb.

Vehicles with static LED headlamps: Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its : u Switches the interior lighting on/off glass tube has been scratched. ; | Switches the automatic interior light- The bulb may explode if: ing control on/off Ryou touch it = p Switches the right-hand reading lamp Rit is hot on/off Ryou drop it ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/ Ryou scratch it off Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed A p Switches the left-hand reading lamp for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the on/off same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with Interior lighting control your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it General notes off with a lint-free cloth. In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. discharging, the interior lighting functions are Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with automatically deactivated after some time liquids. except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 114). Lights and windshield wipers ignition lock. Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic interior lighting control If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. X To switch on/off: press the | button. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a When the automatic interior lighting control is qualified specialist workshop. activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therekfore ma e sure The interior lighting automatically switches on if that these function correctly at all times. Have you: the headlamp setting checked regularly. Runlock the vehicle Vehicles with static LED headlamps Ropen a door The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified The interior light is activated for a short while specialist workshop which has the necessary when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off work required. using the on-board computer (Y page 200).

Z 114 Windshield wipers

Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. You must therefore make sure that these func- X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp right. setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb Switching the windshield wipers type can be found in the legend. on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the Static LED headlamps windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi- : High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W dues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Changing the front bulbs ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to High-beam headlamps (static LED head- optical influences and the windshield becom- lamps) ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off Lights and windshield wipers the windshield wipers in dry weather.

X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and 1 $ Windshield wiper off pull out. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. to low sensitivity) 3 Å X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow Windshield wipers 115

5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast Replacing the wiper blades B í Single wipe î To wipe with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades X X Switch on the ignition. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock 0 X or turn it to position (KEYLESS-GO). Turn the combination switch to the corre- X sponding position. Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper Important safety notes blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the direction of the arrow. G WARNING Installing the wiper blades If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the

wiper. Lights and windshield wipers ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a the wiper arm and slide it into place in the wiper blade back onto the windshield. direction of the arrow. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when The wiper blade audibly engages. you change the wiper blade. If you release the X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor- windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade rectly. and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 116 Windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper are jammed. movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windshield wipers Overview of climate control systems 117

Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters Climate control undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 125). i When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book- let. i It is possible that the residual heat function may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the automatic climate control. 118 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only : Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)

Climate control ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123) ? Display A Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121) B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124) D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120) E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122) F Sets the air distribution (Y page 122) G Sets the airflow (Y page 123) H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)

USA only : Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123) ? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125) A Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 123) B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121) C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124) D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120) E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122) F Sets the air distribution (Y page 122) Overview of climate control systems 119

G Sets the airflow (Y page 123) H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122) I Display

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control Climate control

Canada only Front control panel : Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123) ? Display A Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125) B Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 125) C Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121) D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124) E Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120) F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122) G Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 122) H Sets the airflow (Y page 123) I Sets the air distribution (Y page 122) J Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)

Rear control panel K Increases the temperature (Y page 122) L Display M Reduces the temperature (Y page 122) 120 Operating the climate control systems

Optimum use of automatic climate Operating the climate control sys- control tems Climate control system Activating/deactivating climate control Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use climate control General notes optimally. The 3-zone automatic climate control is only When the climate control is switched off, the air available on vehicles for Canada. supply and air circulation are also switched off. RActivate climate control using the Ã and The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the climate control only briefly Ã and ¿ buttons light up. i Activate climate control primarily using the RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con- Ã button (Y page 121). trol: in automatic mode, you can also set the climate mode (FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). Activating/deactivating Climate control The MEDIUM level is recommended. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function lock (Y page 128). briefly until the windshield is clear again. X To activate: press the Ã button. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if The indicator lamp above the Ã button there are unpleasant outside odors or when in lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set to a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, automatic mode. since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in X To deactivate: press the ^ button. air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp above the ^ button RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper- lights up. ature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control: use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. RIf you change the settings of the climate control system, the climate status display appears for approximately three seconds at the bottom of the screen in the multimedia system display. You will see the current settings of the various climate control functions.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 132). Operating the climate control systems 121

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Switching on/off X To activate: press the ¿ button. The indicator lamp above the ¿ button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ button. Climate control The indicator lamp above the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp over Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal- the ¿ button flashes function. three times or remains X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic Automatic control General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). In automatic mode, the set temperature is main- X Set the desired temperature. tained automatically at a constant level. The X To activate: press the Ã button. system automatically regulates the temperature The indicator lamp above the Ã button of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis- lights up. Automatic air distribution and air- tribution. flow are activated. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function i 3-zone automatic climate control: when is activated automatically in automatic mode. automatic mode is activated, you can set the climate mode (Y page 122). X To switch to manual mode: Dual-zone automatic climate control: press air distribution adjustment switch F (Y page 118). 122 Operating the climate control systems

3-zone automatic climate control: press air 3-zone automatic climate control distribution adjustment switch I (Y page 119). You can select different temperature settings The indicator lamp above the Ã button for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well goes out. as for the rear compartment. or X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press lock (Y page 128). airflow adjustment switch G (Y page 118). X To increase or reduce the temperature in 3-zone automatic climate control: press air- the front compartment: press temperature flow adjustment switch H (Y page 119). adjustment switch F or J up or down The indicator lamp above the Ã button (Y page 119). goes out. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase or reduce the temperature in Adjusting the climate mode settings the rear compartment using the front control panel: press the á button. Climate control The "Set climate mode" function is only available The indicator lamp above the á button with 3-zone automatic climate control. goes out. You can select the following climate mode set- X Press temperature adjustment switch F or tings in automatic mode: J up or down (Y page 119). FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting Only change the temperature setting in small MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft- To increase or reduce the temperature in free setting the rear compartment using the rear control panel: press the r or s button on X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition the rear control panel. Y lock ( page 128). Only change the temperature setting in small X Press the Ã button. increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X Press climate mode selection button G up or down and select the desired level Y ( page 119). Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Setting the temperature P Directs air through the center and side air Dual-zone automatic climate control vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents Different temperatures can be set for the driv- S Directs the airflow through the center er's and front-passenger sides. and side air vents as well as the footwell X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition air vents (Cabriolet only) lock (Y page 128). ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents X To increase or reduce the temperature in a Directs air through the defroster and the front compartment: press temperature footwell vents adjustment switch E or H up or down (Y page 118). i Regardless of the air distribution setting, Only change the temperature setting in small airflow is always directed through the side air increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). vents. The side air vents can only be closed when the controls on the side air vents are turned downwards. Operating the climate control systems 123

Setting the air distribution 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adop- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition ted for the front-passenger side and the rear lock (Y page 128). compartment. X Dual-zone automatic climate control: press air distribution adjustment switch F up or down, until the desired symbol appears in the Defrosting the windshield display (Y page 118). X 3-zone automatic climate control: press air You can use this function to defrost the wind- distribution adjustment switch I up or shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or side down, until the desired symbol appears in the windows on the inside. display (Y page 119). Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Setting the airflow lock (Y page 128). X To activate: press the ¬ button. Dual-zone automatic climate control The indicator lamp above the ¬ button Climate control X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lights up. lock (Y page 128). The climate control system switches to the X To increase or reduce: press airflow adjust- following functions: ment switch G up or down (Y page 118). Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature 3-zone automatic climate control Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition Rair-recirculation mode off lock (Y page 128). If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower X To increase or reduce: press airflow adjust- output may be reduced. Once the battery is suf- H Y ment switch up or down ( page 119). ficiently charged again, full blower output will be If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower available again. output may be reduced. As soon as the battery X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. is sufficiently charged, full blower output will be The indicator lamp above the ¬ button available. goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. Switching the ZONE function on/off X To activate: press the á button. The indicator lamp above the á button MAX COOL maximum cooling lights up. The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi- Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem- cles for the USA. perature setting for the driver's side is not adopted for the front-passenger side. MAX COOL is only operational when the engine is running. 3-zone automatic climate control: the tem- X perature setting for the driver's side is not To activate: press the Ù button. adopted for the front-passenger side and the The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights rear compartment. up. X X To deactivate: press the á button. To deactivate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp above the á button The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes goes out. out. The previously selected settings are restored. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. 124 Operating the climate control systems

When you activate MAX COOL, climate control Activating or deactivating switches to the following functions: X 2 R Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition maximum cooling lock (Y page 128). R maximum airflow X Press the ¤ button. Rair-recirculation mode on The indicator lamp above the ¤ button lights up or goes out.

Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidification function. X Activate automatic mode Ã. X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed air is directed to the side windows. Climate control X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "windshield defrosting" function ¬. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outside X Climate control: press air distribution adjustment switch F up or down (Y page 118), until the P or O symbol appears in the display. X 3-zone automatic climate control: press air distribution adjustment switch I up or down (Y page 119), until the P or O symbol appears in the display. X Adjust the side air vents so that no air is directed to the side windows.

Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Operating the climate control systems 125

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged. defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, ted prematurely or can- interior lighting or the seat heating. not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation mode Switching the residual heat on or off on/off General notes General notes It is possible to make use of the residual heat of

You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if the engine to continue heating the vehicle for Climate control unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from approximately 30 minutes after the engine has outside. The air already inside the vehicle will been switched off. The heating time depends on then be recirculated. the set interior temperature. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win- The "residual heat" function only functions opti- dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at mally with the side windows closed. low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation The "residual heat" function only functions opti- mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog- mally with the soft top closed. ging up. Activating/deactivating Activating or deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 128). lock (Y page 128). X To activate: press the Ì button. X To activate: press the g button. The indicator lamp above the Ì button The indicator lamp above the g button lights up. lights up. i If the residual heat function is activated, the X To deactivate: press the g button. windows may fog up on the inside. The indicator lamp above the g button i goes out. The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: i If you activate the residual heat function at Rafter approximately five minutes at outside high temperatures, only the ventilation will be temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ activated. The blower runs at medium speed. (5 †) X To deactivate: press the Ì button. Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling The indicator lamp above the Ì button with air dehumidification is deactivated goes out. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside Residual heat is deactivated automatically: temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ Rafter approximately 30 minutes (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- R tion" function is activated when the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops 126 Air vents

Air vents midification" function. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box Important safety notes could be damaged. G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air : Air vent control Climate control through the air vents into the vehicle interior, ; Air vent please observe the following notes: When the climate control system is activated, Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on or leaves. the airflow and air distribution settings. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in X To open or close: turn control : to the the vehicle interior. clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the air vents Setting the blower output of the AIR- SCARF vents G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot.

Example : Defroster vent ; Side air vent = Thumbwheel for side air vent X To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.

Setting the glove box air vent ! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle. You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF At high outside temperatures, open the air vents : using the AIRSCARF button vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu- (Y page 102). Driving 127

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Important safety notes the driver's footwell. Install the floormats The sensor system of some driving and driving securely and as specified in order to ensure safety systems adjusts automatically while a sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use certain distance is being driven after the vehicle loose floormats and do not place floormats on has been delivered or after repairs. Full system top of one another. effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. G WARNING New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for of the pedals, e.g.: this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Rshoes with thick soles d parking Rshoes with high heels The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. The more you look after the engine when it is ivi ng an new, the more satisfied you will be with its per- Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct Dr formance in the future. usage of the pedals. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles G WARNING (1500 km). If you switch off the ignition while driving, RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, safety-relevant functions are only available during this period. with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area for example, the power steering and the brake of the tachometer. boosting effect. You will require considerably RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). of an accident. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase Do not switch off the ignition while driving. the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. G WARNING i You should also observe these notes on If the parking brake has not been fully breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive released when driving, the parking brake can: train on your vehicle have been replaced. R i overheat and cause a fire Always observe the respective maximum R permissible speed. lose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Driving ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle Important safety notes stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until G WARNING the engine has reached its operating temper- Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the ature. pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. Only shift the automatic transmission to the The operating and road safety of the vehicle is desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 128 Driving

Where possible, avoid spinning the drive If you depress the brake pedal and press the wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- You could otherwise damage the drive train. ately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the Smart- SmartKey positions key determines whether a valid Smartkey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when SmartKey starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the Smartkey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe Smartkey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the Smartkey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another Smartkey. Driving and parking Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. g To remove the SmartKey Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. (shift the transmission to position P) This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as If you lock the vehicle with the Smartkey's the windshield wipers remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) short time: and drive position Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition 3 To start the engine with the Start/Stop button. R i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition you will not be able to start the engine with the lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for Start/Stop button until the vehicle is the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. unlocked again. The engine cannot be started. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 79), you can continue KEYLESS-GO to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle General notes is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with operates independently of the ECO start/stop Smartkeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS- automatic engine switch-off function. GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the Smartkey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. Driving 129

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the Smartkey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the Smartkey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated

: Start/Stop button Starting the engine ; Ignition lock As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the Important safety notes indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light G WARNING up. Further information on situations where an

indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Driving and parking the engine or lights up while driving they could: (Y page 226). Ropen the doors, thus endangering other If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the key being people or road users. removed from the ignition. Rget out and disrupt traffic. X To switch on the power supply: press Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Start/Stop button : once. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. motion if, for example, they: The power supply is switched off again if: Rrelease the parking brake. Rthe driver's door is opened and Rshifting the automatic transmission out of Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in park position P this position RStart the engine. X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop There is a risk of an accident and injury. button : twice. The ignition is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the If you press Start/Stop button : once when SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never in this position, the ignition is deactivated leave children or animals unattended in the again. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the G WARNING ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust using the Smartkey. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There button mode and Smartkey operation when the transmission is in position P. is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

Z 130 Driving

G WARNING Pulling away Flammable materials introduced through General notes environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or G WARNING parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk If the engine speed is above the idling speed of fire. and you engage transmission position D or R, Carry out regular checks to make sure that the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is there are no flammable foreign materials in a risk of an accident. the engine compartment or in the exhaust When engaging transmission position D or R, system. always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. General notes ! i If a warning tone sounds and the Release The catalytic converter is preheated for up Park. Brake message appears in the multi- to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of function display, the parking brake is still the engine may change during this time. applied. Release the parking brake.

Driving and parking Automatic transmission Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. X Shift the transmission to position P. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled The transmission position display in the mul- away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. tifunction display shows P. You can open the doors from the inside at any i time. You can start the engine in transmission You can also deactivate the automatic locking P N position and . feature (Y page 200). It is only possible to shift the transmission from Starting procedure with the SmartKey position P to the desired position if you depress i To start the engine using the SmartKey the brake pedal. If you do not depress the brake instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be button out of the ignition lock. moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds lock and release it as soon as the engine is after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con- running (Y page 128). verter to reach its operating temperature more quickly.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine Hill start assist i The Start/Stop button can be used to start Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for- the vehicle manually without inserting the wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ the vehicle for a short time after you have Stop button must be inserted in the ignition removed your foot from the brake pedal. This lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. gives you enough time to move your foot from This mode for starting the engine operates the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to independently of the ECO start/stop auto- depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. matic engine start function. G X Depress the brake pedal and keep it WARNING depressed. After a short time, hill start assist will no lon- X Press the Start/Stop button once ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away. (Y page 128). There is a risk of an accident and injury. The engine starts. Driving 131

If the engine has been switched off automati- Therefore, quickly move your foot from the ¤ brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never cally by the ECO start/stop function, the symbol is shown in the multifunction display. leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Automatic engine switch-off Hill start assist is not active if: If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a the ECO start/stop function switches off the downhill gradient. engine automatically. Rthe transmission is in position N. The ECO start/stop function is operational Rthe parking brake is applied. when: R RESP® is malfunctioning. the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range ECO start/stop function that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera- Introduction ture. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior The ECO start/stop function switches the

has been reached. Driving and parking engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped R under certain conditions. the battery is sufficiently charged. R The engine starts automatically when the driver the system detects that the windshield is not wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop fogged up when the air-conditioning system is function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel switched on. consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's Important safety notes seat belt is fastened. i G All of the vehicle's systems remain active WARNING when the engine is stopped automatically. If the engine is switched off automatically and i The HOLD function can also be activated if you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted the engine has been switched off automati- automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. cally. It is then not necessary to continue There is a risk of accident and injury. applying the brakes during the automatic stop If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off phase. When you depress the accelerator the ignition and secure the vehicle against pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deac- rolling away. tivated. i General notes The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession.

Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button R D N : ECO start/stop display in transmission position or the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not The ECO start/stop function is activated when- active ever you start the engine using the Smartkey or Ryou depress the accelerator pedal the Start/Stop button. Ryou engage reverse gear R

Z 132 Driving

Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function Driving and parking

X To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Driving 133

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the Smartkey back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 129). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or start. You cannot hear discharged. Driving and parking the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfir- component of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently. above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 259). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Z 134 Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 134). Important safety notes G Transmission position and drive pro- WARNING gram display If the engine speed is above the idling speed ! and you engage transmission position D or R, If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is should pull away carefully to check whether a risk of an accident. the desired transmission position is engaged. When engaging transmission position D or R, Ideally, you should select transmission posi- always firmly depress the brake pedal and do tion D and drive program E or S. not simultaneously accelerate. The current transmission position and drive pro- d parking gram appear in the multifunction display. G WARNING The arrows in the transmission position display The automatic transmission switches to neu- show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. tral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an Driving an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. : Transmission position display ; Drive program display DIRECT SELECT lever Engaging park position P Overview of transmission positions ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Transmission position display P is shown in the multifunction display. Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengages the parking lock. The transmission is in N neutral. j Park position with parking lock In order to shift from park position P directly into k Reverse gear R or D: i Neutral Rdepress the brake pedal and h Drive Rpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the past the first point of resistance steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission Automatic transmission 135

Engaging park position P automatically There is a risk of an accident and injury. Park position P is automatically engaged if: When leaving the vehicle, always take the Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkey SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never and remove the Smartkey leave children or animals unattended in the Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkey vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of or using the Start/Stop button and open the reach of children. driver's door or front-passenger door X Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is If the transmission is in position D or R: push stationary or driving at very low speed and the the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the transmission is in position D or R first point of resistance. X Under certain conditions, the automatic trans- If the transmission is in position P: depress mission shifts automatically to transmission the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC lever up or down to the first point of resist- PLUS is activated. Observe the information on ance. the HOLD function (Y page 162) and on If you switch the engine off with the transmis- DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 156). sion in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. Engaging reverse gear R With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv- Driving and parking ! er's door or the front-passenger door or remove Only shift the automatic transmission to R the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic when the vehicle is stationary. transmission shifts to P automatically. X If the transmission is in position D or N: push With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first or front-passenger door, the automatic trans- point of resistance. mission shifts to P. X If the transmission is in position P: depress If you want the automatic transmission to the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle lever up past the first point of resistance. cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing The ECO start/stop function is not available system: when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa- X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the tion on the ECO start/stop function Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. Y ( page 131). X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. Shifting to neutral N X Depress the brake pedal and keep it G WARNING depressed. X Shift to neutral N. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, X Release the brake pedal. they could: X Release the parking brake. R open the doors, thus endangering other X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey people or road users. in the ignition lock. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Engaging drive position D Additionally, children could set the vehicle in X If the transmission is in position R or N: push motion if, for example, they: the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first Rrelease the parking brake. point of resistance. X R If the transmission is in position P: depress shifting the automatic transmission out of the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT park position P lever down past the first point of resistance. RStart the engine.

Z 136 Automatic transmission

Transmission positions A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N B Park position while driving. Otherwise, the auto- Only shift the transmission into posi- matic transmission could be dam- tion P when the vehicle is stationary aged. Y ( page 144). The parking lock No power is transmitted from the should not be used as a brake when engine to the drive wheels. parking. Always apply the parking Releasing the brakes will allow you to brake in addition to the parking lock move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push in order to secure the vehicle. it or tow it. If the vehicle electronics are malfunc- ® tioning, the transmission may be If ESP is deactivated or faulty: shift locked in position P. Have the vehicle the transmission only to position N if d parking electronics checked immediately at a the vehicle is in danger of skidding, qualified specialist workshop. e.g. on icy roads. Park position P is automatically If you switch the engine off with the R D engaged if: transmission in position or , the automatic transmission shifts to N Ryou switch off the engine using the automatically.

Driving an Smartkey and remove the Smart- key ! Rolling in neutral N can damage Ryou switch off the engine using the the drive train. Smartkey or using the Start/Stop 7 Drive button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door The automatic transmission changes R gear automatically. All forward gears the driver's door is opened when are available. the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Driving tips C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into posi- Changing gear tion R when the vehicle is stationary. The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 137) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 136) Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Automatic transmission 137

Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle free Vehicles with dynamic handling package or the

Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and AMG sports package d parking forth between transmission positions D and R X Press program selector button :. can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck The selected drive program appears in the in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage- multifunction display. ment restricts switching between transmission positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of i The permanent drive program M is available 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between on the following vehicles: Driving an transmission positions D and R, move the R DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the Vehicles with the dynamic handling pack- point of resistance. age RVehicles with the AMG Sports package Further information about permanent drive Program selector button program M (Y page 139). As well as this permanent drive program M, The program selector button allows you to you can also activate temporary drive pro- choose between different driving characteris- gram M (Y page 138). tics. E Economy Comfortable, economical driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 138). i The automatic transmission shifts to automatic drive program E each time the engine is started. All vehicles (except vehicles with dynamic handling package or the AMG sports package) X Press program selector button :. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display.

Z 138 Automatic transmission

Steering wheel paddle shifters Automatic drive program S Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rsporty engine settings. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notes In the manual drive program, you can change In this drive program, you can briefly change gears manually using steering wheel paddle gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters : and ;. shifters. The transmission must be in position D. Further information about permanent drive pro- You can activate manual drive program M in the gram M (Y page 139). E and S automatic drive programs. Driving and parking Further information about temporary drive pro- i As well as temporary drive program M, you gram M (Y page 138). can also activate permanent drive program M Y i You can only change gear with the steering ( page 137). wheel paddle shifters when the transmission Further information about permanent drive is in position D. program M (Y page 139). Activating X Automatic drive program Shift the transmission to position D. X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle Automatic drive program E shifter (Y page 138). Manual drive program M is temporarily acti- Drive program E is characterized by the follow- vated. The selected gear and M appear in the ing: multifunction display. Rcomfort-oriented engine settings. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the Shifting gears automatic transmission shifting up sooner. If you pull on the left or right steering wheel Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in paddle shifter, the automatic transmission forward and reverse gears, unless the accel- switches to manual drive program M for a limi- erator pedal is depressed fully. ted amount of time. Depending on which paddle Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission stability on slippery road surfaces, for exam- immediately shifts into the next gear down or ple. up, if permitted. X Rthe automatic transmission shifting up To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven paddle shifter (Y page 138). at lower engine speeds and the wheels being The automatic transmission shifts up to the less likely to spin. next gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmis- Automatic transmission 139

sion automatically shifts up in order to pre- or vent engine damage. X Use the program selector button to change X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering the drive program (Y page 137). wheel paddle shifter (Y page 138). Manual drive program M is deactivated. The The automatic transmission shifts down to automatic transmission switches into the the next gear. automatic drive program that was last selected. i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Manual drive program i Automatic down shifting occurs when General information coasting. In this drive program, you can permanently Shift recommendation change gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. i As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive program M (Y page 138). Driving and parking

Switching on the manual drive program The gearshift recommendations assist you in X Press the program selector button adopting an economical driving style. The rec- (Y page 137) repeatedly until M appears in ommended gear is shown in the multifunction the multifunction display. display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to The manual drive program is only available on gearshift recommendation : when shown in vehicles with the dynamic handling package or the multifunction display of the instrument AMG sports package. cluster. Manual drive program M is different from drive program S with regard to spontaneity, respon- Deactivating siveness and smoothness of gear changes. If you have activated manual drive program M, it Manual drive program M can be selected using will remain active for a certain amount of time. the program selector button. In manual drive Under certain conditions the minimum amount program M, you can change gear using the of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral steering wheel paddle shifters if the transmis- acceleration, during an overrun phase or when sion is in position D. The gear selected is shown driving on steep terrain. in the multifunction display. If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the Upshifting automatic drive program that was last selected. X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle You can also deactivate manual drive program shifter. M yourself: The automatic transmission shifts up to the X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle next gear. shifter and hold it in place (Y page 138). or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position (Y page 134).

Z 140 Automatic transmission

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X If corresponding gearshift recommendation : appears in the multifunction display on the instrument cluster, pull on the right- hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 138). The automatic transmission shifts to recom- Driving and parking mended gear ;.

Downshifting X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. i If you brake the vehicle or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission will shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle to accelerate or pull away again. i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the automatic transmission does not shift to a lower gear if this would result in the maximum engine speed being exceeded.

Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed.

Switching off the manual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 137). Refueling 141

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle. ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Driving and parking

Transfer case You must avoid fire, open flames, creating This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans- and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before mitted to both axles. refueling. ! Performance tests may only be carried out G WARNING on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a There is a risk of injury. performance test. You must make sure that fuel does not come ! If the parking brake is being tested on a into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing brake dynamometer, the ignition must be and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop button vapors. Keep fuel away from children. in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will otherwise If you or others come into contact with fuel, automatically intervene. The brake system could otherwise be damaged. observe the following: R ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Wash away fuel from skin immediately with either the front or the rear axle raised, as using soap and water. doing so will damage the transmission. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Refueling out delay. Important safety notes RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomit- G WARNING ing. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel RImmediately change out of clothing which incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- has come into contact with fuel. sion.

Z 142 Refueling

G WARNING The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi- ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and cle. explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening Opening the fuel filler flap the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

Driving and parking : To open the fuel filler flap ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the ; To insert the fuel filler cap fuel system. = Tire pressure table ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled surfaces. You could otherwise damage the X Switch off the engine. paintwork. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys- X Open the driver's door. tem could be blocked by particles from the The on-board electronics now have status 0. fuel can. This is the same as the SmartKey having been Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu- removed. eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- could build up again. tion lock (Y page 128). If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. arrow :. The fuel filler flap opens slightly. i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by X Open the fuel filler flap fully. the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of X the fuel filler flap. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. For further information on fuel and fuel quality X Y Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder ( page 313). bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and Refueling refuel. General information X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Pay attention to the important safety notes Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops Y ( page 141). filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- out. matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle with the key or using KEYLESS-GO. Refueling 143

Closing the fuel filler flap X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 213). Driving and parking

Z 144 Parking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from the G WARNING vehicle. The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving and parking The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 73). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 75). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: G WARNING Rrelease the parking brake. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Rshift the automatic transmission out of the twigs may ignite if they come into contact with parking position P. hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust Rstart the engine. gas flow. There is a risk of fire. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- an accident and injury. cle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain When leaving the vehicle, always take the fields. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Parking 145

To ensure that the vehicle is secured against If you want the automatic transmission to rolling away unintentionally: remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle Rthe parking brake must be applied. cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Rthe transmission must be in position P and the X Smartkey must be removed from the ignition Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the lock. Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock. curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Switching off the engine X Shift to neutral N. X Important safety notes Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. G WARNING X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey in the ignition lock. The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an

Parking brake Driving and parking accident. After switching off the engine, always switch G WARNING to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- If you must brake the vehicle with the parking cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably brake. longer and the wheels could lock. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Vehicles with automatic transmission Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi- X Apply the parking brake firmly. cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not X Shift the transmission to position P. apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until X With the Smartkey: turn the Smartkey to the wheels begin turning again. position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. G WARNING X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button (Y page 128). If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: the instrument cluster go out. Rrelease the parking brake. When the driver's door is closed, this corre- Rshift the automatic transmission out of the sponds to Smartkey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to parking position P. Smartkey position 0: "Smartkey removed". Rstart the engine. If you switch the engine off with the transmis- In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis- ment and become trapped. There is a risk of sion shifts to N automatically. an accident and injury. With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv- When leaving the vehicle, always take the er's door or the front-passenger door or remove SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P.

Z 146 Driving tips

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake, traffic conditions. You could also lose control the brake lamps will not light up. of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle When the engine is running, the $ (USA is stationary. only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Observe the legal requirements for the country X To release: depress the brake pedal and keep in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro- Driving and parking it depressed. hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while X Pull release handle :. driving a vehicle. When the ignition is switched on or the engine If you make a call while driving, always use is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Can- hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone ada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instru- when the traffic situation permits. If you are ment cluster. unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a Parking the vehicle for a long period distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than ond. four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. Drive sensibly – save fuel If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six Observe the following tips to save fuel: weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X The tires should always be inflated to the rec- X ommended tire pressure. Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek X advice. Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. i You can obtain information about trickle X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. chargers from a qualified specialist work- X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. shop. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Main- tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis- Driving tips play. General notes Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter- Important safety notes rain.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available Driving tips 147

Drinking and driving ECO display G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- The ECO display provides feedback on how eco- dent is greatly increased when you drink or nomical your driving characteristics are. The take drugs and drive. ECO display assists you in achieving the most Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow economical driving style for the selected set- anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- tings and prevailing conditions. Your driving ing drugs. style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. The ECO display consists of three bars: Emission control RAcceleration G WARNING RConstant Driving and parking Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RCoasting gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling The percent value is the average value of the these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There three bars. The three bars and the mean value is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage indicates a more economical driving style. the engine running in enclosed spaces with- The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel out sufficient ventilation. consumption.A fixed percentage count in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed consump- Certain engine systems are designed to keep tion. the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. Apart from driving style, consumption is dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the Rload manufacturer's specifications. Always have Rtire pressure work on the engine carried out at a qualified Rcold start specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- Rchoice of route mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- R Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work electrical consumers switched on relevant to safety or on safety-related systems These factors are not included in the ECO dis- must be carried out at a qualified specialist play. workshop. The evaluation of your driving style is carried out The engine settings must not be changed under using the following three categories: any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes- Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Z 148 Driving tips

R Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration Do not shift down for additional engine brak- processes): ing on a slippery road surface. - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds - The bar empties: sporty acceleration Downhill gradients RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at ! On long and steep gradients, you must all times): reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid- lower gear in good time. This allows you to ance of unnecessary acceleration and take advantage of the engine's braking effect. deceleration This helps you to avoid overheating the - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed brakes and wearing them out excessively. RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration When you take advantage of engine braking, a processes): drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep- on a slippery road surface. This could cause ing your distance and early release of the damage to the drive train. This type of damage accelerator. The vehicle can coast without is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war- use of the brakes. ranty. - The bar empties: frequent braking Do not depress the brake pedal continuously

Driving and parking while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the i An economical driving style specially brakes to rub by constantly applying light pres- requires driving at moderate engine speeds. sure to the pedal. This results in excessive and To achieve a higher value in the categories premature wear to the brake pads. Acceleration and Constant: Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Heavy and light loads Rdrive in drive program E. G WARNING i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change. driving, the braking system can overheat. This i increases the stopping distance and can even The ECO display summarizes the driving cause the braking system to fail. There is a characteristics from the start of the journey to risk of an accident. its completion. For this reason, the bars change dynamically at the beginning of the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer depress the brake pedal and the accelerator changes. For more dynamic changes, carry pedal at the same time. out a manual reset. For further information on the ECO display, see ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly (Y page 192). results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy Braking load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow Important safety notes to cool the brakes more quickly. G WARNING Wet roads If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reac- effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. tion from the brakes when braking for the first There is an increased danger of skidding and time. This may also occur after the vehicle has accidents. been washed or driven through deep water. Driving tips 149

You have to depress the brake pedal more ing brake is being tested on a brake dyna- firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the mometer. vehicle in front. Braking maneuvers triggered automatically After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle by ESP® may seriously damage the brake sys- washed, brake firmly while paying attention to tem. the traffic conditions. This will warm up the ! ® brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP sys- and protecting them against corrosion. tem operates automatically, the engine and the ignition system must be switched off Limited braking performance on salt- (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) treated roads when: If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi- Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dyna- due may form on the brake discs and brake mometer. pads. This can result in a significantly longer Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with braking distance. the front axle raised. R In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the Braking maneuvers triggered automatically brakes occasionally while paying attention to by ESP® may seriously damage the brake sys- the traffic conditions. tem. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the Driving and parking beginning and end of a journey. All checks and maintenance work on the brake R system must be carried out at a qualified spe- Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle cialist workshop. ahead. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Servicing the brakes If the brake system has only been subject to ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, R if the red brake warning lamp lights up in press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a the instrument cluster and high speed. This improves the grip of the brake Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is pads. running You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS) Observe additional warning messages in the on (Y page 62) or of BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic multifunction display. Assist on (Y page 62). The brake fluid level may be too low due to The braking characteristics of the vehicle can be brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. seriously impaired if: Have the brake system checked immediately. Rbrake pads other than those recommended Consult a qualified specialist workshop to are installed arrange this. Rthe recommended brake fluid is not used ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per- Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed. formance tests may only be carried out on a 2- axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con- Driving on wet roads sult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the Hydroplaning drive train or the brake system. ! ® If water has accumulated to a certain depth on Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP sys- the road surface, there is a danger of hydro- tem operates automatically, the engine and planing occurring, even if: the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/ Ryou drive at low speeds. Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the park- Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.

Z 150 Driving systems

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur- conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and you must drive in the following manner: braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con- Rlower your speed. trol or DISTRONIC PLUS. Ravoid ruts. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: Ravoid sudden steering movements. X Rbrake carefully. Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not Driving on flooded roads designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check Changes in the outside temperature are dis- the depth of any water before driving through played after a short delay. it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth- Indicated temperatures just above the freezing erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or point do not guarantee that the road surface is the engine compartment. This can damage free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in the electronic components in the engine or wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could the automatic transmission. Water can also skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to and this can cause engine damage. Driving and parking suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing Winter driving point. For more information on driving with snow G WARNING chains, see (Y page 287). If you shift down on a slippery road surface in For more information on driving with summer an attempt to increase the engine's braking tires, see (Y page 287). effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec- There is an increased danger of skidding and tion (Y page 287). accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive G DANGER Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno- If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate vative driver assistance and safety systems ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases which enhance comfort and support the driver in such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi- vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile- becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of stone on the path towards autonomous driving. fatal injury. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehi- running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area cle occupants and that of other road users. around the vehicle are clear of snow. To Further information on driving safety systems ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a (Y page 61). window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Driving systems 151

Cruise control Cruise control lever General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is laden, you must shift to a lower gear in time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady : To activate or increase speed d parking speed for a prolonged period. You can store any ; To activate or reduce speed road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). = To deactivate cruise control ? To activate at the current speed/last stored Important safety notes speed ivi ng an If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con- When you activate cruise control, the stored Dr trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident speed is shown in the multifunction display for nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control five seconds. cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an Activation conditions aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in To activate cruise control, all of the following good time and for staying in your lane. activation conditions must be fulfilled: Do not use cruise control: Rthe parking brake must be released. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in RESP® must be active, but not intervening. heavy traffic or on winding roads Rthe transmission must be in position D. Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Storing and maintaining the current speed Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored.

You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Z 152 Driving systems

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Setting a speed X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling up X Press the cruise control lever up : for a the last stored speed higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- G WARNING ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press : ; If you call up the stored speed and it is lower the cruise control lever up or down to Driving and parking the pressure point. than the current speed, the vehicle deceler- Every time the cruise control lever is pressed ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the up : or down ; the last speed stored is vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There increased or reduced. is a risk of an accident. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press tions before calling up the stored speed. If you the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. do not know the stored speed, store the Every time the cruise control lever is pressed desired speed again. up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. Driving systems 153

There are several ways to deactivate cruise con- Do not use DISTRONI CPLUS while driving on trol: roads with steep gradients. X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it wards :. can resemble the radar detectors of the respon- or sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant X chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions Brake. are asked about this. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: i USA only: This device has been approved by Ryou depress the parking brake the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) radar sensor is intended for use in an auto- RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® motive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any war- R N you shift the transmission to position while ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do driving not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- d parking If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a approved way. warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ Any unauthorized modification to this device trol Off message in the multifunction display could void the user's authority to operate the for approximately five seconds. equipment. ivi ng an i When you switch off the engine, the last i Canada only: This device complies with Dr speed stored is cleared. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- DISTRONIC PLUS ference, and General notes 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto- cause undesired operation of the device. matically helps you maintain the distance to the Removal, tampering, or altering of the device vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected will void any warranties, and is not permitted. with the aid of the radar sensor system. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that approve d way. the set speed is not exceeded. Any unauthorized modification to this device Change into a lower gear in good time on long could void the user's authority to operate the and steep downhill gradients. This is especially equipment. important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. Important safety notes This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wear- G WARNING ing too quickly. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and Rpeople or animals acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the dis- ped or parked vehicles tance warning lamp will light up in the instru- Roncoming and crossing traffic ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give increase the distance to the vehicle in front or warnings nor intervene in such situations. take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. There is a risk of an accident. For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between uation and be ready to brake. 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Z 154 Driving systems

G WARNING Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- Rin road and traffic conditions which do not tify other road users and complex traffic sit- allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads uations. Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: erating could cause the drive wheels to lose Rgive an unnecessary warning and then traction and the vehicle could then skid brake the vehicle Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rneither give a warning nor intervene DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi- Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi- There is a risk of an accident. cles driving on a different line. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to In particular, the detection of obstacles can be brake, in particular when warned to do so by impaired if: DISTRONIC PLUS. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors G WARNING Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Driving and parking DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up R to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. there are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly a risk of an accident. accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and This speed may: try to take evasive action. Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi- activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun- certain situations. tries) To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi- DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in cles driving on the right (right-hand drive the following or other similar situations: countries) R when towing the vehicle If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Rin the car wash driver of the speed stored. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor Cruise control lever override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane.

: To store the current speed or a higher speed ; To store the current speed or a lower speed Driving systems 155

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS i If you do not fully release the accelerator ? To store the current speed or call up the last pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override mes- stored speed sage appears in the multifunction display. The A To set the specified minimum distance set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the Activating DISTRONIC PLUS position of the accelerator pedal. Activation conditions You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- 18 mph (30 km/h). lowing conditions must be fulfilled: X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to you ; up : or down = . two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe parking brake must be released. To activate at the current speed/last RESP® must be active, but not intervening. stored speed RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. G WARNING R D the transmission must be in position . If you call up the stored speed and it differs

R Driving and parking the driver's door must be closed when you from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- shift from P to D or your seat belt must be ates or decelerates. If you do not know the fastened. stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- Rthe vehicle must not skid. dent. Activating Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ;, or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Press the cruise control lever repeatedly up : or down = until the desired speed is X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards set. you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it vehicle in front, but only up to the desired is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth- stored speed. erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehicle is stationary as well.

Z 156 Driving systems

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC Pulling away and driving PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance

d parking between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. X If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi- X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-

Driving an you :. cles. or Stopping X Accelerate briefly. G Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed WARNING to that of the vehicle in front. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: accelerates to the set speed. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing the voltage supply. an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ- R ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated brakes automatically. with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. operates in the same way as cruise control. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in partment, the battery or the fuses have front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In been tampered with. this way, the distance you have selected is main- R tained. the battery is disconnected. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. e.g. by a vehicle occupant. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to There is a risk of an accident. the speed you have stored. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style against rolling away. when you have selected the S or M driving program (Y page 137). Acceleration behind the For further information on deactivating vehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice- DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 158). ably more dynamic. If you have selected the E If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in driving program, the vehicle accelerates more front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is gently. This setting is recommended in stop- stationary. and-start traffic. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. Driving systems 157

Depending on the specified minimum distance, Setting a specified minimum distance your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The You can set the specified minimum distance for specified minimum distance is set using the DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span control on the cruise control lever. between one and two seconds. With this func- When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans- tion, you can set the minimum distance that mission is shifted automatically to position P if: DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat distance in the multifunction display belt is unfastened. (Y page 158). Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient matically switched off by the ECO start/stop distance to the vehicle in front and comply function. with the minimum distance as required by R a system malfunction occurs. law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front Rthe power supply is not sufficient. if necessary.

Setting a speed Driving and parking

You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this func- X Press the cruise control lever up : for a tion, you can set the minimum distance that higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press distance in the multifunction display the cruise control lever up : or down ; to (Y page 158). the pressure point. X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater increased or reduced. distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- X To decrease: ; : ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press turn control in direction . the cruise control lever up : or down ; to DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter the pressure point. distance between your vehicle and the vehicle Every time the cruise control lever is pressed in front. up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Z 158 Driving systems

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed- X Select the Assist. Graphic function using ometer the on-board computer (Y page 196). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

d parking : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis- in front; adjustable sion with a DIRECT SELECT lever = Own vehicle When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two ? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears segments ; in the set speed range light up. when the cruise control lever is actuated) Driving an If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, X Select the Assist. Graphic function using segments ; between speed of the vehicle in the on-board computer (Y page 196). front : and stored speed = light up. i i For design reasons, the speed displayed in You will see the stored speed for about five the speedometer may differ slightly from the seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multifunction display

General notes In the Assistance menu (Y page 196) of the on- board computer, you can select the assistance display. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or : Vehicle in front, if detected X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary ; Distance indicator, current distance to the When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will vehicle in front see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle multifunction display for approximately five sec- in front; adjustable onds. ? Own vehicle i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Driving systems 159 i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you Vehicles traveling on a different line depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist d parking If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav- a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC eling on a different line. The distance to the PLUS Off message in the multifunction display vehicle in front will be too short. for approximately five seconds.

Other vehicles changing lanes ivi ng an

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Dr

General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles traveling on a different line ROther vehicles changing lanes RNarrow vehicles RObstructions and stationary vehicles RCrossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be In such situations, brake if necessary. too short. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Narrow vehicles Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi- its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may front will be too short. brake unexpectedly or late.

Z 160 Driving systems

Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and not brake for these. Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in

Driving and parking Crossing vehicles the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in the speed range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera :, at the top of the windshield. At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist focuses on detected lane markings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in front if lane markings are missing. DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi- If these conditions are not present, Steering cles that are crossing your lane. Activating Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis- DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing tance. traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the pull away unintentionally. function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehi- Driving systems 161 cle could come into contact with the curb or DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not pro- other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of vide assistance: other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly Ron very sharp corners next to your vehicle. Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane has been detected and displayed or projecting out into the lane are not detected. Pay attention also to the important safety notes An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153). intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the The steering interventions are carried out with a opposite direction. limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and wheel and to steer himself. Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering If you do not steer yourself or if you take your intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer period of time, the system will first alert you with the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol leave the lane. appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold The support provided by the system can be of the steering wheel after five seconds at the impaired if:

latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you Driving and parking Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. fog or spray DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. R there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if the road surface is wet) Pilot Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or X Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the ity of the camera on-board computer (Y page 197). Rno, or several, unclear lane markings are pres- The DTR+: Steering Assistant On mes- ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area sage appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Information in the multifunction display Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa- if: ted but not ready for a steering intervention, Ryou actively change lanes steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the R system provides you with support by means of you switch on the turn signal steering interventions, symbol : is shown in Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do green. not steer for a prolonged period of time i After you have finished changing lanes, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again.

Z 162 Driving systems

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is Pilot activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in X Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer- certain situations. ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate the on-board computer (Y page 197). DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off mes- the following or other similar situations: sage appears in the multifunction display. Rwhen towing the vehicle Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deac- Rin the car wash tivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not Activation conditions available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. You can activate the HOLD function if: R d parking the vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running or if it has been auto- HOLD function matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function General notes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is The HOLD function can assist the driver in the fastened Driving an following situations: Rthe parking brake is released Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver Activating the HOLD function having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away X Make sure that the activation conditions are despite being braked by the HOLD function if: met. X Depress the brake pedal. R there is a malfunction in the system or in X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until the voltage supply. ë : appears in the multifunction display. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by The HOLD function is activated. You can pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake release the brake pedal. pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. i If depressing the brake pedal the first time Rthe electrical system in the engine com- does not activate the HOLD function, wait partment, the battery or the fuses have briefly and then try again. been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected Deactivating the HOLD function There is a risk of an accident. The HOLD function is deactivated automatically If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off if: the HOLD function and secure the vehicle Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in against rolling away. position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P. Driving systems 163

Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer- The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in tain amount of pressure until ë disap- sports mode ensures even better contact with pears from the multifunction display. the road. Select this mode when employing a Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country When the HOLD function is activated, the trans- roads. mission is shifted automatically to position P if: X Start the engine. X Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat If indicator lamp ; is not lit: press but- belt is unfastened. ton :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The sports sus- Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- pension setting is selected. matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. i Your selection remains stored until you Ra system malfunction occurs. switch off the engine. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. Comfort tuning

Dynamic handling package with sports mode

General notes Driving and parking The most important part of the dynamic handling package with sports mode is the adjustable damping system. This automatically controls and adapts the suspension to the respective driving situation. The calibration of the suspension depends on: Ryour driving style Rthe road surface conditions In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of R your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, your individual selection; see the following select this mode if you favor a more comfortable description driving style. Select comfort mode also when Vehicles with dynamic handling package driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight with sports mode: In addition to the drive pro- stretches of highway. grams E and S, there is also the manual drive X If indicator lamp = is not lit: press but- Y program M ( page 138). ton :. Indicator lamp = lights up. The comfortable Sports tuning suspension setting is selected.

PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- Example: position of dynamic handling package ment for your attention to your immediate sur- with sports mode button roundings. You are always responsible for safe

Z 164 Driving systems

maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. (example) Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean to malfunction. the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 267). PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on

Driving and parking uneven terrain. Range PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

Range of the sensors

General notes Example: side view PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

Example: top view Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Driving systems 165

Rear sensors Transmission posi- Warning display tion Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) D Front area activated Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. R or N Rear and front areas 80 cm) activated P No areas activated Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi- Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) cle's distance from the obstacle. From the: If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel- R evant warning displays light up and a warning sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter- tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min- mittent warning tone for approximately two imum, the distance may no longer be shown. seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds.

Warning displays Driving and parking This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- : Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC cle ; Indicator lamp = Segments showing operational readiness If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is The warning displays show the distance deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also between the sensors and the obstacle. The deactivated. warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated warning display for the rear area is located when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in between the rear seats. the ignition lock. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running.

Z 166 Driving systems

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe- ing displays are lit. You cialist workshop. also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 267). ing displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then Driving and parking deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. General notes There is a risk of an accident. Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid Pay attention to other road users. Stop the with ultrasound. It measures the road on both vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park- sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates ing Assist parking procedure. a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you ! during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- (Y page 163). cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the i The active braking application is only avail- wheels or tires. able on vehicles with automatic transmission. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for park- Important safety notes ing, for example: Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited replacement for your attention to your immedi- Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits ate surroundings. You are always responsible Ron unsuitable surfaces for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a Parking tips: parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park- space as possible. ing Assist is also unavailable. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. G WARNING RParking spaces that are partially occupied by While parking or pulling out of a parking trailer drawbars might not be identified as space, the vehicle swings out and can drive such or be measured incorrectly. Driving systems 167

RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- space being measured inaccurately. ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC travel if: (Y page 165) warning messages during the Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next parking procedure. to one another RYou can intervene in the steering procedure Rthe parking space is directly next to a low to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist obstacle such as a low curb will then be canceled. Ryou park forwards R When transporting a load which protrudes Active Parking Assist does not assist you park- from your vehicle, you should not use Active ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles Parking Assist. to the direction of travel if: R Never use Active Parking Assist when snow R chains are installed. the parking space is on a curb R RMake sure that the tire pressures are always the system reads the parking space as being correct. This has a direct influence on the blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav- parking characteristics of the vehicle. ing blocks R Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: the area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into R parallel or at right angles to the direction of Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, travel e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Driving and parking Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the sidewalk.

Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken Example: detected parking space into account when the parking procedure is cal- : culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or Detected parking space on the left loading ramps of goods vehicles. ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right G WARNING Active Parking Assist is switched on automati- If there are objects above the detection range: cally when driving forwards. The system is RActive Park Assist may steer too early operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys- Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these tem independently locates and measures park- objects ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle. You may cause a collision as a result. There is Active Parking Assist will only detect parking a risk of an accident. spaces: If objects are located above the detection Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of range, stop and deactivate Active Parking travel R Assist. that are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide For further information on the detection range Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and (Y page 164). at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle

Z 168 Driving systems

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym- measure the length of a parking space if it is at bol shows the desired parking space in the right angles to the direction of travel. You will instrument cluster. need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into X Shift the transmission to position R. the parking space. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: When driving at speeds below 19 mph % message appears in the multifunction (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a display. status indicator in the instrument cluster. When X To cancel the procedure: press the % a parking space has been detected, an arrow button on the multifunction steering wheel or towards the right or the left also appears. By pull away. default, Active Parking Assist only displays park- or ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking X To park using Active Parking Assist: press spaces on the driver's side are displayed as the a button on the multifunction steering soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is wheel. activated. When parking on the driver's side, The Park Assist Active Accelerate this must remain switched on until you acknowl- and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press- sage appears in the multifunction display. ing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.

Driving and parking whether the parking space is parallel or at right X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all angles to the direction of travel. times. When backing up, drive at a speed A parking space is displayed while you are driv- below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth- ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. (15 m) away from it. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the Parking rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking G WARNING spaces. If you leave the vehicle when it is only being The Park Assist Active Select D braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll Observe Surroundings message appears in away if: the multifunction display. X R Shift the transmission to position D while the there is a malfunction in the system or in vehicle is stationary. the voltage supply. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Rthe electrical system in the engine com- the other direction. partment, the battery or the fuses have The Park Assist Active Accelerate been tampered with. and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- R sage appears in the multifunction display. the battery is disconnected. i R You will achieve the best results by waiting the accelerator pedal has been depressed, for the steering procedure to complete before e.g. by a vehicle occupant. pulling away. There is a risk of an accident. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it times. against rolling away. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill. i Vehicles with automatic transmission: The Park Assist Active Select R When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Observe Surroundings message appears in Parking Assist brakes automatically during the multifunction display. the parking process. You are responsible for Further transmission shifts may be necessary. braking in good time. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Disabled message appears in the multifunction display and you will hear a Driving systems 169 tone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is Active Parking Assist can only assist you with kept stationary without the driver having to exiting a parking space if you have parked the depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using canceled when you depress the accelerator Active Parking Assist. pedal. X Start the engine. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you X Release the parking brake. with steering interventions and brake applica- X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished, are pulling away. you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: X Maneuver if necessary. % message appears in the multifunction X Always observe the warning messages dis- display. played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 165). X To cancel the procedure: press the % Parking tips: button on the multifunction steering wheel or RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park- pull away. ing space after parking is dependent on vari- or ous factors. These include the position and X To exit a parking space using Active Park- shape of the vehicles parked in front and ing Assist: press the a button on the mul-

behind it and the conditions of the location. It tifunction steering wheel. Driving and parking may be the case that Active Parking Assist The Park Assist Active Accelerate guides you too far into a parking space, or not and Brake Observe Surroundings mes- far enough into it. In some cases, it may also sage appears in the multifunction display. lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. you should cancel the parking procedure with X Active Parking Assist. Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do R not exceed a maximum speed of approx- You can also select preselect transmission imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park- position D. The vehicle redirects and does not ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist drive as far into the parking space. Shoulda will be canceled. gear be changed too early, the parking pro- X D R cedure will be canceled. A sensible parking Shift the transmission to position or as position can no longer be achieved from this required or according to the message while position. the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Exiting a parking space Active Accelerate and Brake Observe In order that Active Parking Assist can support Surroundings message appears in the mul- you when exiting the parking space: tifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting Rthe border of the parking space must be high for the steering procedure to complete before enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too pulling away. small, for example. If you back up after activation, the steering Rthe border of the parking space must not be wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi- too wide, as the position of the vehicle must tion. not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the parking X Drive forwards and back up as instructed by space. the PARKTRONIC warning displays. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft Once you have exited the parking space com- (1.0 m) must be available. pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the i Vehicles with automatic transmission: Park Assist Finished message appears in If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active the multifunction display. You will then have to Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the steer and merge into traffic on your own. vehicle exits the parking space. You are PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over responsible for braking in good time.

Z 170 Driving systems

the steering, before the vehicle has exited the Rear view camera parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already General notes possible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking Assist You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any time. X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message

d parking appears in the multifunction display and you hear a tone. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center Rear view camera : is an optical parking and console (Y page 165). maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your ivi ng an PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park- vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys- Dr ing Assist is immediately canceled. The Park tem display. Assist Canceled message appears in the The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a multifunction display and you hear a tone. mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically i The text shown in the multimedia system if: display depends on the language setting. The Rthe transmission is shifted too early following are examples of rear view camera messages in the multimedia system display. Rtransmission position P is selected R parking using Active Parking Assist is no lon- Important safety notes ger possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. In replacement for your attention to your immedi- such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in ate surroundings. You are always responsible the instrument cluster. for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis- persons, animals or objects in the area in which appears and the multifunction display shows the you are maneuvering. Park Assist Canceled message. Under the following circumstances, the rear When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you view camera will not function, or will function in must steer and brake again yourself. a limited manner: If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is R braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the if the trunk lid is open accelerator again. Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Driving systems 171

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Messages in the multimedia system dis- Observe the notes on cleaning play (Y page 267) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this The rear view camera may show a distorted view event, have the camera position and setting of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. checked at a qualified specialist workshop The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional Rvery close to the rear bumper accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. Runder the rear bumper license plate holder, bicycle rack). Rin the area immediately above the tailgate On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, handle leaving the standard height can result in inac- ! curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech- Objects not at ground level may appear to nical conditions. be further away than they actually are, e.g.: R i The rear view camera is protected from rain- the bumper of a parked vehicle drops and dust by means of a flap. When the Rthe drawbar of a trailer rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch The flap closes again when: Rthe rear section of an HGV

Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ra slanted post Driving and parking Ryou switch off the engine Use the guidelines only for orientation. Ryou open the trunk Approach objects no further than the bottom- most guideline. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 267). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear view camera X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- X Engage reverse gear. imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the The rear view camera flap opens. The area vehicle behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in ; White guide line without turning the steering the multimedia system display. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior The image from the rear view camera is avail- mirrors (static) able throughout the maneuvering process. = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti- including the exterior mirrors, for current vates if you shift the transmission to P or after steering wheel angle (dynamic) driving forwards a short distance. ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic)

Z 172 Driving systems

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper : White guide line without turning the steering D Red guide line at a distance of approximately wheel, vehicle width including the exterior 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle mirrors (static) Driving and parking The guide lines are shown when the transmis- ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width sion is in position R. including the exterior mirrors, for current The distance specifications only apply to steering wheel angle (dynamic) objects that are at ground level. = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 171). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. : Front warning display Red guide line ? is then at the end of the ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel operational readiness indicator in the parking space. = Rear warning display When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 165), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the multimedia system display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly. Driving systems 173

Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle

: White guide line at current steering wheel

angle d parking ; Parking space marking : Parking space marking X ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width Turn the steering wheel to the center position including the exterior mirrors, for current while the vehicle is stationary.

steering wheel angle (dynamic) ivi ng an

X Drive past the parking space and bring the Dr vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 171). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.

Z 174 Driving systems

Wide-angle function Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic : Symbol for the wide-angle view function guidelines are hidden. ; Own vehicle When you change between transmission posi- = PARKTRONIC warning displays tions D and R, you see the previously selected You can also use the rear view camera to select front or rear view. a wide-angle view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also Driving and parking When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 165), be optically displayed: a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets display of the multimedia system. If the around the vehicle icon in the top view, or PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn- Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets ing displays = light up in the multimedia system around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode in yellow or red accordingly. The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC 360° camera is active General notes Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle The 360° camera is a system that consists of Rred line: an object is present in the immediate four cameras. close range of the vehicle The system processes images from the following cameras: Important safety notes RRear view camera R The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a Front camera distorted view of obstacles, show them incor- RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a The cameras capture the immediate surround- substitute for attentive driving. ings of the vehicle. The system supports you, You are always responsible for safe maneuver- e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking, exit. make sure that there are no persons, animals or You can show pictures from the 360° camera in objects in the area in which you are maneuver- full-screen mode or in seven different split- ing. screen views on the multimedia system display. You are always responsible for safety, and must A split-screen view also includes a top view of always pay attention to your surroundings when the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data parking and maneuvering. This applies to the supplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam- areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. era). You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth- The six split-screen views are: ers. Driving systems 175

The 360° camera will not function or will func- Ra split screen with top view and the image tion in a limited manner: from the front camera or Rif the doors are open Ra split screen with top view and the image Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in from the rear view camera Rif the trunk lid is open or X Ø Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Press the button in the center console. R The vehicle menu is displayed. at night or in very dark places X R Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm. if the cameras are exposed to very bright light Depending on whether position D or R is Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED engaged, the following is shown: lighting (the display may flicker) Ra split screen with top view and the image Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, from the front camera or e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win- Ra split screen with top view and the image ter from the rear view camera Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered R if the vehicle components in which the cam- Activating the 360° camera using eras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked reverse gear

at a qualified specialist workshop The 360° camera images can be automatically Driving and parking Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You displayed by engaging reverse gear. can otherwise injure others or cause damage to X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 objects or the vehicle. in the ignition lock. Guide lines are always shown at road level. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear The field of vision and other functions of the function is selected in the multimedia system camera system may be restricted due to addi- (see the separate operating instructions). tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. X To show the 360° camera image: license plate holder, bicycle rack). engage reverse gear. On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, The area behind the vehicle is shown in the depending on technical conditions, leaving the multimedia system display in split-screen standard height can result in: mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and Rinaccuracies in the guide lines the image from the rear view camera. Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view) Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays Activation conditions Switching between split screen views The 360° camera image can be displayed if: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera slide 5 the controller. Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3 lock the controller. Rthe multimedia system is switched on X To switch to 180° View: turn the con- R 3 the 360° Camera function is switched on troller to select 180° View and press 7 to confirm. Switching on the 360° camera i The 180° View option is only available in the X Press the Ø button in the center console following views: for longer than two seconds. RTop view with picture from the rear view Depending on whether position D or R is camera engaged, the following is shown: RTop view with picture from the front camera

Z 176 Driving systems

Messages in the multimedia system dis- ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering play wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width Important safety notes including the exterior mirrors, for current The system may show a distorted view of obsta- steering wheel angle (dynamic) cles or show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view ! Objects not at ground level may appear to B be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Driving and parking R the bumper of a parked vehicle imately 3 ft (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle R the drawbar of a trailer D Bumper Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch E Red guide line at a distance of approximately Rthe rear section of an HGV 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle Ra slanted post The guide lines are shown when the transmis- Use the guidelines only for orientation. sion is in position R. Approach objects no further than the bottom- The distance specifications only apply to most guideline. objects that are at ground level. Top view with picture from the rear view Top view with picture from the front cam- camera era

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- : Symbol for the split screen setting with top imately 13 ft (4 m) from the rear of the vehi- view and front camera image cle ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ; Symbol for the split screen setting with top imately 13 ft (4 m) from the front of the view and rear view camera image vehicle = Guide line for the maximum steering angle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems 177

A Red guide line at a distance of approximately i You can also select the side camera setting 12 in (0.3 m) from the front of the vehicle for the rear-facing view. B Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1 m) from the front of the vehi- 180° view cle Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image

: Symbol for the split screen setting with top ; Own vehicle Driving and parking view and rear view camera image enlarged = PARKTRONIC warning displays ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately i 180° view can also be selected as front 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle view. This view assists you in estimating the distance Select this view when you are driving out of an to the vehicle behind you. exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, i This setting can also be selected as an for example. enlarged front view. Exiting 360° camera display mode Top view with image from the side cameras The 360° camera display is stopped Rwhen you select transmission position P, or Rwhen you are driving at moderate speeds The previous display appears on the multimedia system display. You can also switch the display by selecting the & symbol in the display and pressing 7 the controller to confirm.

ATTENTION ASSIST General notes

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, side camera setting monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph including the exterior mirrors (right side of (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST vehicle) detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width driver, it suggests taking a break. including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle)

Z 178 Driving systems

Important safety notes The following information is displayed: R ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might not length of the journey since the last break. always recognize fatigue or increasing inatten- Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION tiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels The system is not a substitute for a well-rested from high to low. and attentive driver. Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is the attention level and cannot output a warn- restricted and warnings may be delayed or not ing, the System Suspended message occur at all: appears. The bar display then changes the R display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below if the length of the journey is less than approx- 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph imately 30 minutes (200 km/h). Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Activating ATTENTION ASSIST Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- board computer (Y page 197). eration The system determines the attention level of Rif you are predominantly driving at a speed the driver depending on the setting selected: Driving and parking below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph Standard selected: the sensitivity with which (200 km/h) the system determines the attention level is set Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS to normal. Steering Assist activated Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher. Rif the time has been set incorrectly The attention level detected by Attention Assist Rin active driving situations, such as when you is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned change lanes or change your speed earlier. The attention level evaluation is deleted and When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the restarts when the journey is continued, if: À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc- R tion display in the assistance display when the you switch off the engine engine is running. R you take off your seat belt and open the driv- When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to it is automatically reactivated after the engine take a break has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (stand- Displaying the attention level ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: Attention Assist: Take a Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning You can have current status information dis- tone. played in the assistance menu (Y page 196) of X the on-board computer. If necessary, take a break. X X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION Confirm the message by pressing the a ASSIST using the on-board computer button on the steering wheel. (Y page 196). On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take a break, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen Driving systems 179 if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi- Important safety notes cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is output able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign in the multifunction display, a service station Assist display. search is performed in the multimedia system. You can select a service station and navigation The system may be either functionally impaired to this service station will then begin. This func- or temporarily unavailable if the information in tion can be activated and deactivated in the the digital street map of the navigation system is multimedia system. incorrect or out of date. Instrument cluster display Traffic Sign Assist Displaying the assistance graphic General notes X Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed (Y page 196). permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. X The data stored in the navigation system and Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. general traffic regulations are used to determine Detected traffic signs are displayed in the Driving and parking the current speed limit. instrument cluster. As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, Speed limit with unknown restriction traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road- works) are not detected. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits is upda- ted. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown. The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine : Maximum permitted speed whether the restriction applies ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a which the restriction in the additional sign is maximum permitted speed from any of the avail- relevant able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the = Additional sign for unknown restriction instrument cluster either. A maximum permitted speed of 100 mph (100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h (80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 196).

Z 180 Driving systems

Speed limits in wet conditions Blind Spot Assist

General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive an optical and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. : Maximum permitted speed ; Additional signs for wet conditions Important safety notes A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph G WARNING (80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if Traffic Sign Assist has determined that the restriction Blind Spot Assist does not react to:

Driving and parking must be observed. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Canceling the speed limit placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road The speed limit no longer applies :. users and obstacles. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) i USA only: depends on the country in which you are driv- This device has been approved by the FCC as ing. It is generally neither shown on the traffic a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be is intended for use in an automotive radar taken into account when observing the max- system only. Removing, tampering with, or imum permitted speed. altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved Lane Tracking package way. Any unauthorized modification to this device General notes could void the user’s authority to operate the The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind equipment. Spot Assist (Y page 180) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 182). Driving systems 181

Monitoring range of the sensors or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact In particular, the detection of obstacles can be or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have impaired if: the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else otherwise not work properly. covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy Indicator and warning display rain, snow or spray Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Indicator lamp (yellow) Driving and parking Warning lamp (red) Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be occurs if the difference in speed is less than indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- 7 mph (12 km/h). ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse edge of their lanes. gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist is no longer active. Due to the nature of the system: The brightness of the indicator or warning lamps Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving is adjusted automatically according to the ambi- close to crash barriers or similar solid lane ent light. borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an Collision warning extended period next to long vehicles, such as If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of trucks. Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre- The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are sponding turn signal, a double warning tone integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica- slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :. must not be covered, for example by cycle racks There are no further warning tones.

Z 182 Driving systems

Switching on Blind Spot Assist G WARNING X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Y ( page 198) is activated in the on-board return the vehicle to the original lane. There is computer. a risk of an accident. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. You should always steer, brake or accelerate Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and ing Assist. then turn yellow. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep- Lane Keeping Assist ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane General notes Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep- ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi- Driving and parking cle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted is wet) at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping R Assist detects lane markings on the road and the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or can warn you before you leave your lane unin- covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- tentionally. ity of the camera R This function is available in the range between there are no, several or unclear lane markings 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work A warning may be given if a front wheel passes R over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow up to 1.5 seconds. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- Important safety notes ted R G WARNING the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly Rthe road is narrow and winding recognize lane markings. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Switching on Lane Keeping Assist Rgive an unnecessary warning X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using R not give a warning the on-board computer; to do so, select There is a risk of an accident. Standard or Adaptive (Y page 198). Always pay particular attention to the traffic If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, situation and stay in lane, in particular if the lines in the assistance graphics display warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Driving systems 183

(Y page 196) are shown in green. Lane Keep- Active Blind Spot Assist ing Assist is ready for use. General notes Standard Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor If Standard is selected, no warning vibration system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, occurs if: to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In this which the driver is unable to see. A warning dis- event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer- play in the exterior mirrors draws your attention tain period of time. to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as you then switch on the corresponding turn sig- ABS, BAS or ESP®. nal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli- Adaptive sion is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra- brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval- tion occurs if: uates the space in the direction of travel and at R you have switched on the turn signals. In this the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer- Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen- tain period of time. sors. R a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a Driving and parking BAS or ESP®. speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Important safety notes Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not obstacle or change lanes quickly. a substitute for attentive driving. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. G WARNING In order that you are warned only when neces- Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: sary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, and warns you accordingly. placing them in the blind spot area The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Rvehicles which approach with a large speed Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a differential and overtake your vehicle bend. As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei- R the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit- Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. uations. There is a risk of an accident. The warning vibration occurs later if: Always observe the traffic conditions care- Rthe road has narrow lanes. fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as Active Driving Assistance package a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar General notes system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, The Active Driving Assistance package consists and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam- of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153), Active Blind per with, alter, or use in any non-approved Spot Assist (Y page 183) and Active Lane Keep- way. ing Assist (Y page 186). Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Z 184 Driving systems

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non- approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and The detection of obstacles can be impaired in Driving and parking behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure the case of: that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors covering the sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have indicated or indicated with a delay. the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. Monitoring area If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be G WARNING indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv- Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the traffic situations and road users. There is a case if there are vehicles at the edge of their risk of an accident. lane. Always make sure that there is sufficient dis- Due to the nature of the system: tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. Driving systems 185

Warning display Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course- correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake appli- : Warning display cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds sides. below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi- cles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi- Driving and parking cator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot If a course-correcting brake application occurs, monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir- (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond- ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, ing side lights up red. This warning is always display ; appears in the multifunction display given when a vehicle enters the blind spot mon- underlining the danger of a side collision. itoring range from behind or from the side. When In very rare cases, the system may make an you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs inappropriate brake application. An inappropri- if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph ate course-correcting brake application may be (12 km/h). interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse opposite direction or accelerate, for example. gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not The course-correcting brake application is avail- operational. able in the speed range between 20 mph The brightness of the warning lamps is auto- (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). matically adapted to the brightness of the sur- Either no braking application, or a course-cor- roundings. recting brake application adapted to the driving Visual and acoustic collision warning situation occurs if: R If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the warning. You then hear a double warning tone side. and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig- Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated high cornering speeds. by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. no further warning tones. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.

Z 186 Driving systems

RESP® is switched off. nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the detected. distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist your lane. X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously (Y page 198) is activated in the on-board keep your vehicle in its lane. computer. G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light clearly detect lane markings. up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist then turn yellow. can: d parking Rgive an unnecessary warning and then Active Lane Keeping Assist make a course-correcting brake application General notes to the vehicle

ivi ng an Rnot give a warning or intervene

Dr There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter- minate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, front of your vehicle by means of multifunction fog or spray camera : at the top of the windshield. Various Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the different areas to the front, rear and side of your sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the is wet) radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or Assist detects lane markings on the road and covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin- can warn you before you leave your lane unin- ity of the camera tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers lane-correcting application of the brakes can or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by bring the vehicle back into the original lane. snow This function is available in the range between Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you work when driving, the radar sensor system must be Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov- operational ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Important safety notes Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detec- If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane ted Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of R accident nor override the laws of physics. Active the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of branch off, cross one another or merge road and weather conditions. It may not recog- Driving systems 187

Rthe road is narrow and winding A lane-correcting brake application can be made Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road after driving over a lane marking recognize as If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and being solid or broken. Before this, a warning broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor- must be given by means of intermittent vibration recting brake application is made. in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recog- Warning vibration in the steering wheel nized. A warning may be given if a front wheel passes In the case of a broken lane marking being over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of detected, a lane-correcting brake application intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for can only be made if a vehicle has been detected up to 1.5 seconds. in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can have an influence on brake application: oncom- Lane-correcting brake application ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehicles that are driving parallel to your vehicle. G WARNING i A lane-correcting brake application cannot A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned always bring the vehicle back into the original to the original lane. lane. There is a risk of an accident. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,

R Driving and parking especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli- Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. cation. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with G high cornering speeds or high rates of accel- WARNING eration. Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf- Ryou have switched on the turn signal. fic conditions or road users to a limited Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, extent. In very rare cases, the system may PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. make an inappropriate brake application, e.g. RESP® is switched off. after intentionally driving over a solid lane Rthe transmission is not in position D. marking. There is a risk of an accident. Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane in An inappropriate brake application may be which you are driving. interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire the opposite direction. Always make sure that has been detected and displayed. there is sufficient distance on the side for There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep- other traffic or obstacles. ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic situation. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction. Rswitch on the turn signal. Rclearly brake or accelerate. A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan- PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display.

Z 188 Driving systems

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using the on-board computer; to do so, select Standard or Adaptive (Y page 198). If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 196) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: R Driving and parking you have switched on the turn signal. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Displays and operation 189

Important safety notes One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: G WARNING The segments between the speed of the vehi- If you operate information systems and com- cle in front and the stored speed light up. munication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control Tachometer of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this Only operate the equipment when the traffic could damage the engine. situation permits. If you are not sure that this The red band in the tachometer indicates the is possible, park the vehicle paying attention engine's overrevving range. to traffic conditions and operate the equip- The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the ment when the vehicle is stationary. engine when the red band is reached. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. Outside temperature display G WARNING You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- point. On-board computer and displays functioned, you may not recognize function Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis- restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The play indicates the temperature measured and operating safety of your vehicle may be does not record the road temperature. impaired. There is a risk of an accident. The outside temperature display is in the multi- Y Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked function display ( page 191). at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- The multifunction display shows changes in the ately. outside temperature with a delay.

The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunc- Coolant temperature display tion display. You should therefore make sure G your vehicle is operating safely at all times. WARNING If the operating safety of your vehicle is Opening the hood when the engine is over- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. heated or when there is a fire in the engine Contact a qualified specialist workshop. compartment could expose you to hot gases For an overview, see the instrument panel illus- or other service products. There is a risk of Y tration ( page 33). injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before Displays and operation opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed Speedometer with segments and contact the fire department.

The segments in the speedometer indicate ! A display message is shown if the coolant which speed range is available. temperature is too high. R Cruise control activated (Y page 151): If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ The segments light up from the stored speed (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine to the type-tested maximum speed. will otherwise be damaged. R DISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 153): The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 33). Z 190 Displays and operation

Under normal operating conditions and with the Left control panel specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; Operating the on-board computer 9 Press briefly: : RScrolls in lists Overview RSelects a submenu or function RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous or next station, when the preset list or station list is active, or an audio track or video scene RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or telephone number 9 Press and hold: : RIn the Audio menu: selects a preset list or a station list in the desired frequency range, or an

On-board computer and displays audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open : Multifunction display R ; Switches on voice-operated navigation or a Confirms the selection or display the Voice Control System message = Right control panel RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: ? Left control panel switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number A Back button X To activate the on-board computer: turn Right control panel the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and R the settings in the on-board computer using ~ Rejects or ends a call the buttons on the multifunction steering RExits the telephone book/redial wheel. memory Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys- 6 RMakes or accepts a call tem: you can find further information on the RSwitches to the redial memory Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions. W RAdjusts the volume Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys- X tem: you can find further information on R voice-operated navigation in the manufactur- 8 Mute er's operating instructions. Menus and submenus 191

Back button R¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 131) Rë HOLD function (Y page 162) % Press briefly: RBack RSwitches off voice-operated navi- Menus and submenus gation or the Voice Control System Menu overview RHides display messages or calls up the last Trip menu function used Press the = or ; button on the steering RExits the telephone book/redial wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu. memory Operating the on-board computer (Y page 190). % Press and hold: Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: RCalls up the standard display in the RTrip Y Trip menu menu ( page 191) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 193) R Y Multifunction display Audio menu ( page 194) RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 195) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 196) RServ. menu (Y page 198) On-board computer and displays RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 198) The displays are controlled by the multimedia system. For this reason, the displays for the Audio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly to those in your vehicle.

Trip menu : Text field ; Menu bar Standard display = Drive program ? Transmission position A Permanent display: outside temperature or speed X To display menu bar ;: press the = or ; button on the steering wheel. If you do not press the buttons any longer, menu bar ; is faded out after a few seconds. X Press and hold the % button on the steer- Text field : shows the selected menu or sub- ing wheel until the Trip menu with trip odom- menu as well as display messages. eter : and odometer ; appears. Possible displays in the multifunction display: RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 138) Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 166) RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 151) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 112)

Z 192 Menus and submenus

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Displaying the range and current fuel Reset" consumption

: Distance X Press the = or ; button on the steering ; Driving time wheel to select the Trip menu. = Average speed X Press 9 or : to select the display with ? Average fuel consumption approximate range and the current fuel con- X Press the = or ; button on the steering sumption. wheel to select the Trip menu. The approximate range that can be covered X depends on the fuel level and your current Press the 9 or : button to select driving style. If there is only a small amount of From Start or From Reset. fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu- The values in the From Start submenu are cal- eled C appears instead of approximate culated from the start of a journey whilst the range.

On-board computer and displays values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset Digital speedometer (Y page 192). In the following cases, the trip computer is auto- X Press the = or ; button on the steering matically reset From Start: wheel to select the Trip menu. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more X Press the 9 or : button to select the than four hours. digital speedometer. R999 hours have been exceeded. A gearshift recommendation Z can also R9,999 miles have been exceeded. appear in the display. Observe the information on gearshift recom- When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been Z exceeded, the trip computer is automatically mendation when shifting manually (Y page 138). reset From Reset.

ECO display Resetting values X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ECO X Press the 9 or : button to select the DISPLAY. function that you wish to reset. X Press a to confirm your selection. If the ignition remains switched off for longer X than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- Press : to select Yes and press a to matically reset. confirm. For more information on the ECO display, see You can reset the values of the following func- (Y page 147). tions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display Menus and submenus 193 i If you reset the values in the ECO display, Change of direction announced without a the values in the "From Start" trip computer lane recommendation are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions : In the Navi menu, the multifunction display Road into which the change of direction shows navigation instructions. leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual Observe the additional information on naviga- distance display tion in the separate operating instructions of the multimedia system. = Change-of-direction symbol X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa- When a change of direction is announced, you rate operating instructions). will see symbol = for the change of direction ; X Press the = or ; button on the steering and distance graphic . The distance indicator wheel to select the Navi menu. shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.

Route guidance not active On-board computer and displays Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Direction of travel ; Current road : Road into which the change of direction leads Route guidance active ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display No change of direction announced = Lanes not recommended ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction A Change-of-direction symbol On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. : Distance to destination Lane not recommended =: you will not be able ; Distance to the next change of direction to complete the next change of direction if you = Current road stay in this lane. ? "Follow the road's course" symbol Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next two changes of direction without changing lane.

Z 194 Menus and submenus

Other status indicators of the naviga- the preset list or station list in the desired tion system frequency range is shown. X To select a station: briefly press 9 or :. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. For more information on radio operation, see "Satellite radio" in the separate operating instructions.

The navigation system displays additional infor- Operating an audio player or audio mation and the vehicle status. media Possible displays: RNew Route... or Calculating Route A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route Audio data from various audio devices or media On-board computer and displays No route could be calculated to the selected can be played, depending on the equipment destination. installed in the vehicle. R O: you have reached the destination or an X intermediate destination. Switch on the multimedia system and select audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate operating instructions). X = ; Audio menu Press the or button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. Selecting a radio station X To select the next/previous track: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired track : appears. If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If track information is stored on the audio : Active station list device or medium, the multifunction display ; Station frequency with memory position will show the number and title of the track. The menu shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset position is Video DVD operation only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on the multimedia system and select Radio (see the separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select a preset list or station list: press and briefly hold the 9 or : button until Menus and submenus 195

Only for vehicles with COMAND: you can use the You will see one of the following display mes- Audio menu to operate video DVDs. sages in the multifunction display: X Switch on the multimedia system and select RPhone READY or the name of the network video DVD (see the separate operating provider: the mobile phone has found a net- instructions). work and is ready to receive. X Press the = or ; button on the steering RPhone No Service: there is no network wheel to select the Audio menu. available or the mobile phone is searching for X To select the next or previous scene: a network. briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list Accepting a call (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : If someone calls you when you are in the Tel appears. menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time regardless of the menu selected. Telephone menu X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel Introduction to accept an incoming call.

G WARNING Rejecting or ending a call If you operate information systems and com- X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel On-board computer and displays munication equipment integrated in the vehi- to reject or end a call. cle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control Selecting an entry in the phone book of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic X Press the = or ; button on the steering situation permits. If you are not sure that this wheel to select the Tel menu. X is possible, park the vehicle paying attention Press the 9, : or a button to to traffic conditions and operate the equip- switch to the phone book. X ment when the vehicle is stationary. Authorize access to the phone book on the phone. When telephoning, you must observe the legal X Press the 9 or : button to select the requirements for the country in which you are desired name. currently driving. or X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu- X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold : facturer’s operating instructions). or 9 for longer than one second. X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa- The names in the phone book are displayed rate operating instructions). quickly one after the other. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to the mul- Rapid scrolling stops when you release the timedia system (see the separate operating button or reach the end of the list. instructions). X If only one telephone number is stored for X Press the = or ; button on the steering a name: press the 6 or a button to wheel to select the Tel menu. start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.

Z 196 Menus and submenus

or Displaying the assistance graphic X To exit the telephone book: press the ~ or % button.

Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. memory. X Press 9 or : to select Assist. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Graphic. desired name or number. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. The multifunction display shows the or DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ The assistance graphic shows you the status or % button. and further information on the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 179) On-board computer and displays Assistance menu RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153) Introduction RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Depending on the equipment installed in the (Y page 64) vehicle, you have the following options in the RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 177) DriveAssist menu: R Y R Lane Keeping Assist ( page 182) Displaying the assistance graphic R (Y page 196) Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 186) X : RDeactivating/activating ESP® (Y page 196) Press to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 197) Deactivating/activating ESP® R ® Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE Brake i ® (Y page 197) Observe the important safety notes on ESP (Y page 67). RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVEN- TION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 197) G WARNING R Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- Y ( page 197) bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk R Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or of skidding and an accident. Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 198) ® RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 198) bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Menus and submenus 197

For further information about ESP®, see X Press a to confirm. (Y page 66). The current selection appears. X Start the engine. X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- X Press the = or ; button on the steering ton again. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the assistance graphic shows X 9 : ESP Press or to select . the æ symbol in the multifunction display. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. For further information about COLLISION PRE- VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 64). X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Activating/deactivating Steering ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp in Assist and Stop&Go Pilot the instrument cluster lights up continuously when the engine is running. X Press the = or ; button on the steering If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not available X Press the 9 or : button to select DTR due to a malfunction. +: Steer. Asst. Observe the information on warning lamps X Press a to confirm. (Y page 227). The current selection appears. Observe the information on display messages X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- (Y page 203). ton again.

When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are On-board computer and displays Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® activated, the multifunction display shows the DTR+: Steer. Asst. On Brake message. Further information about DISTRONIC PLUS PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot with the Driving Assistance package. (Y page 160). X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Activating/deactivating ATTENTION X Press the 9 or : button to select PRE- ASSIST SAFE Brake. X Press the = or ; button on the steering X a Press to confirm. wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. The current selection appears. X Press the 9 or : button to select X To activate/deactivate: a press the but- Attention Assist. ton again. X Press a to confirm your selection. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the The current selection appears. assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in X the multifunction display. Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, ‑ ® For more information on PRE SAFE Brake, see Standard or Sensitive. (Y page 69). X Press the a button to save the setting. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the Activating/deactivating COLLISION é symbol appears in the multifunction dis- PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS play in the assistance graphics display. X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information about ATTENTION wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. ASSIST, see (Y page 177). X Press the 9 or : button to select Col‐ lision Prevent..

Z 198 Menus and submenus

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Settings menu Assist Introduction X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Depending on the equipment installed in the X Press the 9 or : button to select vehicle, you have the following options in the Blind Spot Assist. Sett. menu: R X Press the a button. Changing the instrument cluster settings The current selection appears. (Y page 198) R X To activate/deactivate: press the a but- Changing the light settings (Y page 199) ton again. RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 200) R For further information about Blind Spot Assist, Changing the convenience settings Y see (Y page 180). ( page 200) R Y For further information about Active Blind Spot Restoring the factory settings ( page 201) Assist, see (Y page 183). Instrument cluster Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func- X Press the = or ; button on the steering tion allows you to choose whether certain dis- wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-

On-board computer and displays X Press the 9 or : button to select tifunction display. Lane Keep. Assist. X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the a button. wheel to select the Sett. menu. The current selection appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press a to confirm. Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press the : or 9 button to set Off, X Press a to confirm. Standard or Adaptive. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to save the setting. Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane You will see the selected setting: km or miles. Keeping Assist is activated, the multifunction X Press the a button to save the setting. display shows the lane markings as bright lines in the assistance graphic. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: For further information about Lane Keeping R Assist, see (Y page 182). the digital speedometer in the Trip menu R For further information about Active Lane Keep- the odometer and trip odometer ing Assist, see (Y page 186). Rthe trip computer Rthe current consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu Service menu Rcruise control Depending on the equipment installed in the RDISTRONIC PLUS vehicle, you have the following options in the RASSYST PLUS service interval display Serv. menu: Selecting permanent display RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 202) The Permanent Display: function allows you RChecking the tire pressure electronically to choose whether the multifunction display (Y page 291) always shows the outside temperature or the speed. RCalling up the service due date (Y page 261) The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. Menus and submenus 199

X Press the = or ; button on the steering X Press the : or 9 button to select the wheel to select the Sett. menu. Day. Run. Lights function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the If the Day. Run. Lights function has been Instrument Cluster submenu. switched on, the multifunction display shows W X Press a to confirm. the cone of light and the symbol in orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X a Permanent Display: function. Press the button to save the setting. The current setting, Outside Temperature Further information on daytime running lamps or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer (Y page 109). [mph], appears. Activating/deactivating surround light- X Press the a button to save the setting. ing and exterior lighting delayed switch- off Lights X Press the = or ; button on the steering Setting the brightness of the instrument wheel to select the Sett. menu. cluster lighting and switches X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis- X a plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can Press to confirm. be adjusted with the Brightness Display/ X Using : or 9, select the Surround Switches: function. Lighting function. If the Surround Lighting function is activa- X = ; Press the or button on the steering ted, the light cone and the area around the On-board computer and displays Sett. wheel to select the menu. vehicle are displayed in orange in the multi- X Press the : or 9 button to select the function display. Lights submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior Brightness Display/Switches: function. lighting temporarily: The current setting appears. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey X Press a to confirm. to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition brightness to any level from Level 1 to lock. Level 5 (bright). The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is X Press the a or % button to save the deactivated. setting. Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or reactivated the next time you start the engine. L position, the brightness is dependent If you have activated the Surround Lighting upon the brightness of the ambient light. function and the light switch is set to the Ã i position, the following functions are activated The light sensor in the instrument cluster when it is dark: automatically controls the brightness of the R multifunction display. surround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking In daylight, the displays in the instrument with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the cluster are not illuminated. surround lighting is switched off and auto- Switching the daytime running lamps on/ matic headlamp mode is activated Y off ( page 109). Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the X = ; Press the or button on the steering exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds Sett. wheel to select the menu. after the engine is switched off. If you close all X Press the : or 9 button to select the the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light- Lights submenu. ing goes off after 15 seconds. X Press a to confirm.

Z 200 Menus and submenus

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, Activating/deactivating the acoustic when the surround lighting and delayed locking verification signal switch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow- If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an ing light up: acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi- RParking lamps cle. R Side marker lamps X Press the = or ; button on the steering RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Activating/deactivating the interior light- Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. ing delayed switch-off X Press a to confirm. If you activate the Light. Delay function, the X Press the : or 9 button to select the interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after Acoustic Lock function. you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, X Press the = or ; button on the steering the & symbol in the multifunction display wheel to select the Sett. menu. lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to save the setting. Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. Convenience X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light. Delay function. Activating/deactivating the EASY- When the Light. Delay function is activa-

On-board computer and displays ENTRY/EXIT feature ted, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. G WARNING X Press the a button to save the setting. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle Vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Activating/deactivating the automatic While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- door locking mechanism ing adjustments, make sure that no one has X Press the = or ; button on the steering any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. If somebody becomes trapped: X Press a to confirm. Rpress one of the memory function position X Press the : or 9 button to select the buttons, or Auto. Door Locks function. Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Auto. Door Locks If the function is switched ment in the opposite direction to that in on, the multifunction display shows the vehicle's doors in orange. which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the a button to save the setting. The adjustment process is stopped. If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function, X Press the = or ; button on the steering the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of wheel to select the Sett. menu. around 9 mph (15 km/h). X Press the : or 9 button to select the For further information on the automatic locking Convenience submenu. feature, see (Y page 79). X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus 201

X Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/ Exit function. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104). Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Convenience submenu. Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior mir- X a Press to confirm. rors will not fold out automatically (Y page 106). X : 9 Press the or button to select the You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors Belt Adjustment function. using button :. When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in the multifunction display. Restoring the factory settings X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steering For further information on belt adjustment, see wheel to select the Sett. menu. On-board computer and displays (Y page 45). X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- X Press a to confirm. ing feature on/off The Reset All Settings? function This function is only available when the vehicle is appears. equipped with the electrical fold-in function. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ Yes. ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded in X Press a to confirm the selection. when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the If you have selected Yes and confirmed, the vehicle and then open the driver's or front- multifunction display shows a confirmation passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out message. again. For safety reasons, the Day Lights function in X Press the = or ; button on the steering the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle wheel to select the Settings menu. is stationary. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is switched on, the multifunction display shows the vehicle's exterior mirror in orange. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z 202 Display messages

Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 162) RParking (Y page 144)

Hiding display messages X On-board computer and displays Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. Display messages 203

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- !÷ gram) are temporarily not available. Currently Unavaila‐ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. ble See Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. On-board computer and displays If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. !÷ ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. Inoperative See $ J Operator's Manual The (USA only) or (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 204 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. Inoperative See Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc- T! tioning.

On-board computer and displays ÷ Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. Inoperative See In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the Operator's Manual instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also (USA sounds. only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake. only) Please Release Park‐ ing Brake Display messages 205

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. $(USA In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) G WARNING Check Brake Fluid Level The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays mbrace Inoperative Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. tion Assist Plus Possible causes are: Currently Unavaila‐ R ble See Operator's the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- Manual tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐ COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due tion Assist Plus to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 206 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Functions Currently Possible causes are: Limited See Opera‐ R tor's Manual function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Restart the engine.

® ® On-board computer and displays PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE PLUS or PRE‑SAFE Brake is unavailable due to a mal- Functions Limited function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ual Display messages 207

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors Dirty At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems See Operator's Man‐ is temporarily restricted or inoperative: ual RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RPRE-SAFE® Brake RPRE-SAFE® PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operative

again. On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 267): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. A G Risk of injury Malfunction Service Cabriolet: the roll bars are defective. Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in 6 the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 40).

Z 208 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. 6 The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service G WARNING RequiredorFront The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. 6 The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service G WARNING RequiredorRear The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered Right Malfunction unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air On-board computer and displays bag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet). Left Side Curtain The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Airbag Malfunction Service G WARNING Required Right or The left or right window curtain air bag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet) Side Curtain Airbag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, Malfunction Service may not be triggered. Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages 209

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even bag Disabled though: See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult ual or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center On-board computer and displays console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-di agnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front- passenger front air bag (Y page 49) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐ tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49). Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even bag Enabled though: See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's ual weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat

Z 210 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. On-board computer and displays X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49) Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Man‐ ual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49). Display messages 211

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The corresponding bulb is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Low Beam (example) or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 113). i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. b The active light function is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual b The light sensor is defective. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auto Lamp Function Inoperative You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone b also sounds. Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to position Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Assist Currently Possible causes are: Unavailable See R Operator's Manual the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 212 Display messages

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. ! Check Coolant Level Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine See Operator's Man‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. ual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 259). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot On-board computer and displays Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Display messages 213

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. See Operator's Man‐ ual Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is # too low. Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds. Operator's Manual X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). On-board computer and displays X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 258). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 259). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you need to add engine oil more often than usual. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes- benz.com. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low

Z 214 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. Gas Cap Loose If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or À a lack of concentration on the part of the driver.A warning tone also Attention Assist: sounds. On-board computer and displays Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist Inoperative Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are: ble See Operator's R Manual the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. Off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 162). Display messages 215

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 162). Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and Currently Unavaila‐ temporarily inoperative. ble See Operator's Possible causes are: ManualorActive Lane R Keeping Assist Cur‐ the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. rently Unavailable Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. See Operator's Man‐ Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. ual Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying On-board computer and displays attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. InoperativeorActive X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Currently Unavaila‐ Possible causes are: ble See Operator's R ManualorActive the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature Blind Spot Assist range. Currently Unavaila‐ Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec- ble See Operator's tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or Manual other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Restart the engine.

Z 216 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. InoperativeorActive The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. Blind Spot Assist X Inoperative Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 166). Park Assist Inoper‐ You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu- ative vers. On-board computer and displays Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 166). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated automatically (Y page 153) DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily Available unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 153). Display messages 217

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. rently Unavailable Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are: ual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. On-board computer and displays erative The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE® Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. --- mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 153).

Z 218 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Assist. Currently Possible causes are: Unavailable See R Operator's Manual the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: Steering Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty. Assist. Inoperative However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.

On-board computer and displays A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. --- mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 151). Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated automatically (Y page 151). Display messages 219

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 291). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 293). Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The Tires wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 270). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 291). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel Tire Malfunction position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 270).

Z 220 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no Currently Unavaila‐ signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure ble monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Moni‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tor Inoperative No tire pressure monitor is deactivated. Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is faulty. On-board computer and displays Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi- to Start Engine: tion R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

To Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi- Apply Brake tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To Deselect P or N, With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans- Depress Brake and mission out of position P or N into another transmission position. Start Engine X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine. Display messages 221

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Risk of Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in Vehicle Not in 'P' position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Close the driver's door completely. Only Shift The vehicle is moving. to 'P' when Vehicle X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying is Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required Do You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds. Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected: On-board computer and displays X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Poss. You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction. Service Required The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo- function Stop nents. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. Malfunction X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

Z 222 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid. M The hood is open.A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right- _ hand side.A warning tone also sounds. Rear Left Backrest On-board computer and displays X Push the backrest back until it engages. Not LatchedorRear Right Backrest Not Latched The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. A _ warning tone also sounds. Lock Seat Backrest X Push the backrest back until it engages. Front LeftorLock Seat Backrest Front Right Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ G WARNING tor's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. J Cabriolet: the trunk partition is open. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 91). Trunk Partition Open Display messages 223

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot K open or close the soft top. Convertible Top X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 86). Operation Possible to 25 mph The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres- K surized. Convertible Top Low‐ X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 86). ering K The roof is not locked. If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannot Open/Close Conver‐ open or close the soft top. tible Top Completely X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Push or pull and hold the soft-top switch until the soft top is fully open or closed (Y page 86). The on-board voltage is too low. K X

Start the engine. On-board computer and displays Start Engine See Operator's Manual The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the soft top again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 86). The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below ¥ the minimum. Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 260).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key

Z 224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 76). Replace Key Battery The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the Â driver's door with the engine switched off. Don't Forget Your This display message is shown in the multifunction display for a max- Key imum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle. Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Key Not Detected If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen- (red display message) trally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. On-board computer and displays A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this is preventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode. Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO func- Key Not Detected tions in the vehicle. (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning Remove 'Start' But‐ tone also sounds. ton and Insert Key X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 225 and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving.

Safety Seat belts

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases. On-board computer and displays ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Z 226 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp $J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds. You are driving with the parking brake applied. X Release the parking brake. The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

$J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Y

On-board computer and displays Secure the vehicle against rolling away ( page 144). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 227

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. On-board computer and displays If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. $J N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and ÷å the yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is ! running. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 228 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or the traction control system has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67).

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica- tions. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 229

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING On-board computer and displays The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 40).

Z 230 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Engine

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. On-board computer and displays 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 231

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 259). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ On-board computer and displays (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡(120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 259). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

Z 232 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X

On-board computer and displays Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 69). Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 64). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 233

Tires

Warning/ N Signal type indicator Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions lamp h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). On-board computer and displays X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 270). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 291). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 234 Function restrictions

General notes Please always use this feature instead of con- sulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from The multimedia system section in this manual traffic conditions and driving, and increase the describes the basic principles for operation. risk of an accident. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. Important safety notes This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum G WARNING permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is If you operate information systems and com- desirabl e that it should be installed and operated with at least 8inches (20cm) and more munication equipment integrated in the vehi- between the radiator and a person's body cle while driving, you will be distracted from (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and traffic conditions. You could also lose control legs.) of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this Modifications to electronic components, their is possible, park the vehicle paying attention software as well as wiring can impair their to traffic conditions and operate the equip- function and/or the function of other net- ment when the vehicle is stationary. worked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a

Multimedia system You must observe the legal requirements for the result, these may no longer function as inten- country in which you are currently driving when ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of operating the multimedia system. the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an The multimedia system calculates the route to accident and injury. the destination without taking the following into Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec- account, for example: tronic components or their software. You R traffic lights should have all work to electrical and elec- R stop and yield signs tronic equipment carried out at a qualified Rparking or stopping restrictions specialist workshop. Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- The multimedia system may give incorrect nav- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- igation recommendations if the actual street/ dered invalid. traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Function restrictions Ra diverted route R For safety reasons, some functions are restric- the road layout or the direction of a one-way ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. street has been changed You will notice this, for example, because either For this reason, you must always observe road you will not be able to select certain menu items and traffic rules and regulations during your or a message will appear to this effect. journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Operating system 235

Operating system the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. Overview i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. General notes ! Do not use the space in front of the display Functions for storage. Objects placed here could dam- The multimedia system has the following func- age the display or impair its function. Avoid tions: any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in RRadio mode impairments to the display, which could be RMedia mode with media search irreversible. RSound systems Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your RNavigation system ability to read the display. COMAND: navigation via the hard drive The display has an automatic temperature-con- Audio 20: navigation via SD card trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is RCommunication functions automatically reduced if the temperature is too R high. The display may temporarily switch off SIRIUS Weather (COMAND) completely. RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions Cleaning instructions Controller ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a The controller in the center console lets you: risk of scratching. If you have to clean the Rselect menu items on the display Multimedia system screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent R and a soft, lint-free cloth. enter characters Rselect a destination on the map The display must be switched off and have R cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not save entries apply pressure to the display surface when The controller can be: cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam- Rturned 3 age to the display. Rslid left or right 1 R Switching the multimedia system slid forwards or back 4 R on/off slid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 X Press the q control knob. Back button Adjusting the volume You can use the % button to exit a menu or to X Turn the q control knob. call up the basic display of the current operating The volume is adjusted: mode. X To exit the menu: % Rfor the currently selected media source briefly press the R button. during traffic or navigation announcements The multimedia system changes to the next Rin hands-free mode during a phone call higher menu level in the current operating mode. Switching the sound on or off X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. X 8 Press the button on the control panel. The multimedia system changes to the basic If the audio output is switched off, the status display of the current operating mode. line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch

Z 236 Operating system

Favorites Navigation mode Calling up and exiting favorites Important safety notes

X To call up: press the ò button on the con- G WARNING troller. If you operate information systems and com- X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. munication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from X To exit: press the ò button again. traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Adding favorites Only operate the equipment when the traffic Adding a predefined favorite situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system.

General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In Multimedia system : Adds a new favorite certain situations, GPS reception may be ; Renames a selected favorite impaired, there may be interference or there = Moves a selected favorite may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or ? Deletes a selected favorite parking garages. ® X ò Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN MAP PILOT Press the button. (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Slide 6 the controller. The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions The menu bar is shown. are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file. X Select Reassign. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The categories are displayed. The following descriptions apply to navigation X Select a category. with COMAND. Further information can be The favorites are displayed. found in the Digital Operator's Manual. X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. Selecting a route type and route options If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Multimedia system: X Select NaviQNavigation. Adding your own favorite The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Slide 6 the controller. X Press and hold the ò button until the X Select OptionsQRoute Settings. favorites are displayed. Notes for route types: X Add a favorite at the desired position. REco Route If a favorite has already been added at this R position, it will be overwritten. Dynamic Traffic Route (only available in the USA and Canada) Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account. Operating system 237

RDynamic TRF. Route After Request (only Further options for destination entry: available in the USA and Canada) Rsearch for a keyword You can decide whether or not current traffic The keyword search finds destinations using reports should be taken into account for route fragments of words. calculation. Rselect the last destination RCalculate Alternative Routes Rselect a contact Different routes are being calculated. In order R to do so, instead of Start, select the menu select a POI item Continue. You can search for a POI by location, name or Notes for route options: telephone number. Rselect destination on the map RUse Toll Roads Renter intermediate destination The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). You can map the route to the destination R yourself with up to four intermediate destina- Number of Occupants in the Vehicle: tions. (only available in the USA) Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access Apps conditions for carpool lanes. Rselect geo-coordinates Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. Calculating the route Entering an address Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. Multimedia system: X Select Start or Continue.

X Multimedia system Select NaviQNavigation. The route is calculated with the selected route The map shows the vehicle's current position. type and the selected route options. X Slide 6 the controller. If route guidance has already been activated, X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. a prompt will appear asking whether you wish Enter an address, e.g. as follows: to end the current route guidance. X Rcity or ZIP code, street, house number Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐ R tination. state/province, city or ZIP code Yes cancels the current route guidance and Rcity or ZIP code, center starts route calculation to the new destina- Rstreet, city or ZIP code, intersection tion. X Select City. Set as Intermediate Destination adds The city in which the vehicle is currently loca- the new destination in addition to the existing ted (current vehicle position) is at the top. destination and opens the intermediate des- Below this, you will see locations for which tinations list. route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on Connecting a mobile phone the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide the 5 control- Prerequisites ler. ® X For telephony via the Bluetooth interface, you Select the location. ® If available, the zip code is shown. If there are require a Bluetooth -capable mobile phone. The different ZIP codes available for the location, mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile the corresponding digits are displayed with an 1.0 or above. X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu.

Z 238 Operating system

Multimedia system: security settings on your mobile phone (see the X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ manufacturer's operating instructions). tingsQActivate Bluetooth. Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. X Activate Bluetooth® O. Searching for a mobile phone Mobile phone: Multimedia system: X ® Activate Bluetooth and, if necessary, Blue- X Tel/®QConnect ® Select tooth visibility for other devices (see the DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart manufacturer's operating instructions). Search. The Bluetooth® device names for all of one man- The available mobile phones are displayed. ufacturer's products might be identical. To Symbols in the device list make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the man- Sym- Explanation ufacturer's operating instructions). bol If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Ï New mobile phone found, not yet Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message authorized. Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is connect: not connected RPhone book # Mobile phone is authorized and RCall lists connected RText messages and e-mails i Connecting a mobile phone

Multimedia system Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained on the Internet at: Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ X Select mobile phone. connect A code is displayed in the multimedia system i In the USA you can also contact the and on the mobile phone. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). system. In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus- X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend- tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for Searching for and authorizing a mobile the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The phone prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur- Before using your mobile phone with the multi- er's operating instructions). media system for the first time, you will need to X If the codes are different: select No on the search for the phone and then authorize (con- multimedia system. nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author- The process is canceled. ization either takes place by means of Secure Repeat authorization. Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the Authorization by entering a passkey: procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone X Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. available. The mobile phone is always connec- The input menu for the passkey is displayed. ted automatically after authorization. Further X information on using a mobile phone with the Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi- multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's nation as a passkey. Manual). X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. If the multimedia system does not detect your X Press ¬ to confirm. mobile phone, this may be due to particular X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, Operating system 239

confirm the connection to the multimedia sys- Inserting/removing an SD memory card tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up Important safety notes to two minutes to be displayed (see the man- G ufacturer's operating instructions). WARNING SD memory cards are small parts. They can be Switching between mobile phones swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal If you have authorized more than one mobile injury. phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, Multimedia system: seek immediate medical attention. X Select Connect Device. X Select a mobile phone from the device list. ! If you are no longer using the SD memory card, you should remove it and take it out of the vehicle. High temperatures can damage Media mode the card. Inserting an SD memory card General notes The SD card slot is on the control panel. If you wish to play external media sources, the X Insert the SD memory card into the SD card default display must already be turned on. Fur- slot until it engages. The side with the con- ther information on media mode (see the Digital tacts must face downwards. Operator's Manual).

The following external media sources can be Ejecting an SD memory card Multimedia system used: X Press the memory card. RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®) The memory card is ejected. RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) X Remove the memory card. RCD Connecting USB devices RDVD (COMAND Online) RSD cards There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® X Connect the USB device to the USB port. i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD X Select the media source (Y page 239). changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device list Multimedia system: X Select MediaQDevices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played.

Z 240 Stowage areas

Stowage areas tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. Loading guidelines RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry G objects. WARNING RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos- If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or sible and as low down in the trunk as possible. not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip RThe load must not protrude above the upper over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle edge of the seat backrests. occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- RAlways place the load against the rear or front larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- seat backrests. Make sure that the seat den change in direction. backrests are securely locked into place. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied Always store objects so that they cannot be seats if possible. flung around. Secure objects, luggage or RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel loads against slipping or tipping before the nets to transport loads and luggage. journey. RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the G WARNING load. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for gases can enter the vehicle interior if the protection. trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a Stowage spaces risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening Important safety notes the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid Stowage and features G open. WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are G WARNING stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In become very hot. If you come into contact addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn and mobile phone brackets cannot always yourself. There is a risk of injury. retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden Always be particularly careful around the braking or a sudden change in direction. exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow R these components to cool down before touch- Always stow objects so that they cannot be ing them. thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or are dependent on the distribution of the load stowage nets. within the vehicle. For this reason, you should R observe the following notes when transporting a Close the lockable stowage spaces before load: starting a journey. RNever exceed the maximum permissible RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in rating for the vehicle (including occupants). the trunk. The values are specified on the vehicle iden- Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240). Stowage areas 241

Glove box Stowage compartment in the center console

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until arrow. it engages. Cover : swings upwards. i The glove box can be ventilated Stowage compartment under the arm- (Y page 126). rest Stowage and features

The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To open: press left-hand button ; or right- X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the hand button :. lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. The stowage compartment opens. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol- lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a position 1. multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot and 2 USB ports (Media Interface), e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see the separate operating instructions.

Stowage compartment under the front seats

G WARNING If you exceed the maximum load for the stowage compartment, the cover may not be able to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle

Z 242 Stowage areas

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240). larly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Securing cargo Never exceed the maximum permissible load for the stowage compartment. Stow and Cargo tie-down rings secure heavy objects in the trunk. General notes The maximum permissible load of the stowage Observe the following notes on securing loads: compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg). RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 240). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Trunk X To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ; forwards.

Stowage nets Stowage and features Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left and right-hand sides of the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 240).

Cargo tie-down rings : Through-loading facility in the rear Bag hook

G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. X Fold down the rear seat armrest. X Pull handle : and fold cover ; downwards. Features 243

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure and mobile phone brackets cannot always a load. retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin- : Bag hook ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk.

Stowage well under the trunk floor ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, ! Unhook the handle before again before clos- strong and direct sunlight. The passenger ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre- compartment in the area of the center con- vent the handle flap from protruding. Other- sole can otherwise be damaged by the con- wise, you could damage the handle. centrated and reflected sunlight. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240).

Cup holder in the front-compartment Stowage and features center console

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up.

: Cup holder Features You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for Cup holder cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. Important safety notes

G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

Z 244 Features

Cup holder in the rear stowage box Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

X To open: slide front cup holder cover ; and rear cup holder cover : in the direction of the arrows.

Sun visors X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of Overview the arrow.

G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded Ashtray up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be Front ashtray blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an

Stowage and features accident. ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not Always keep the mirror cover folded down heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is while driving. properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged.

: Mirror light ; Bracket X To open: open the stowage compartment = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket (Y page 241). ? Vanity mirror X To remove the insert: grip recesses ; and A Mirror cover lift insert = up and out. X To re-install the insert: press insert = into the holder until it engages. X To close: press stowage compartment cover : down until it engages. Features 245

You can remove the ashtray insert and use the Cigarette lighter in the front compart- resulting compartment for stowage. ment Rear-compartment ashtray

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. X To open: open the stowage compartment X To remove the insert: press release but- (Y page 241). ton = and lift the insert up and out. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. X To install the insert: install insert : from Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically above into the holder and press down into the when the heating element is red-hot. holder until it engages. X To close: press stowage compartment cover : down until it engages.

Cigarette lighter 12 V sockets Important safety notes Stowage and features General notes G WARNING X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition You can burn yourself if you touch the hot lock (Y page 128). heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: include such items as chargers for mobile Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to engine is switched off, the battery may dis- objects, for example charge. There is a risk of fire and injury. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. board voltage does not drop too low. If the on- Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is board voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there out of reach of children. Never leave children is sufficient power to start the engine. unsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit.

Z 246 Features

Socket in the rear-compartment center The mbrace system console To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the volume control on the multimedia system. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. You can find information and a description of all X available features under "Owners Online" at Lift up the cover of socket :. http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test mbrace After you have switched on the ignition, the sys- General notes tem carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected The mbrace system is only available in the USA. if one of the following occurs: You must have a license agreement to activate R the mbrace service. Make sure that your system The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not is activated and operational. To log in, press the come on during the system self-test. ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Stowage and features mentioned are not carried out, the system may Assistance button does not light up during not be activated. self-diagnosis of the system. If you have questions about the activation, con- RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call tact one of the following telephone hotlines: button does not light up during self-diagnosis Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at of the system. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol- 1-866-990-9007 lowing buttons continues to light up red after Shortly after successfully registering with the the system self-diagnosis: mbrace service, a user ID and password will be - SOS button sent to you by mail. You can use this password - F Roadside Assistance call button to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners - ï MB Info call button http://www.mbusa.com Online" at . RThe Inoperative or the Service Not The system is available if: Activated message appears in the multi- Rit has been activated and is operational function display after the system self-diagno- Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is sis. available for transmitting data to the Cus- If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, tomer Center the system may not operate as expected. In the Ra service subscription is available event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol- RGPS reception is available. lowing service hotlines: Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. Features 247

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at All important information on the emergency is 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or transmitted, for example: 1-866-990-9007 Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Emergency call Rvehicle identification number R Important safety notes information on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initi- G WARNING ated, a voice connection is automatically estab- It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, lished between the Customer Assistance Center even if you have pressed the SOS button in an and the vehicle occupants. R emergency if: If the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- attempts to get more information on the cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident emergency. R Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of If there is no response from the vehicle occu- road pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. R the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be If no voice connection can be established to the seen by other road users, particularly when Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, dark or in poor visibility conditions the system has been unable to initiate an emer- There is a risk of an accident and injury. gency call. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indi- lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu- Move to a safe location along with other vehi- ously. cle occupants. In such situations, secure the The Call Failed message appears in the mul- vehicle in accordance with national regula- tifunction display and must be confirmed. Stowage and features tions, e.g. with a warning triangle. In this case, summon assistance by other means. General notes Making an emergency call Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 246). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. X To initiate an emergency call manually: Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunc- press cover : briefly to open. tion display. X Press and hold the SOS button for at least one second ;. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

Z 248 Features

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes- From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Benz Customer Assistance Center. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center X After the emergency call, close cover :. can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 251). If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech- pressing the SOS button, you will not know nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In to be transported to the nearest authorized this case, always summon assistance by other Mercedes-Benz Center. means. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Roadside Assistance button You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Road- side Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road- X To end a call: press the ~ button on the side Assistance button :. multifunction steering wheel.

Stowage and features This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- or tomer Assistance Center. X Press the corresponding multimedia system The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button for ending a phone call. button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is MB Info call button muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- tomer Assistance Center. Voice output is not available in this case. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : A voice connection is established between the flashes while the connection is being made. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The Connecting Call message appears in and the vehicle occupants. Features 249

the multifunction display. The audio output is The indicator lamp of the respective button muted. flashes until the call is ended. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ An emergency call can only be terminated by the nected message appears in the multifunction Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. display. All other calls can be ended by pressing: If a mobile phone network and GPS reception Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering are available, the system transfers data to the wheel Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia for example: system to end the voice call Rcurrent location of the vehicle When a call is initiated, the audio system is Rvehicle identification number muted. The multimedia system display indicates that a The mobile phone is no longer connected to the call is active. During the call, you can change to multimedia system. the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but- However, if you want to use your mobile phone, ton on COMAND, for example. do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in Voice output is not available in this case. a safe location. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Downloading destinations and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your Downloading destinations d features vehicle, about the nearest authorized Downloading destinations gives you access to a Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- database with over 15 million points of interest an ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi- e You can find further information on the mbrace gation system in your vehicle. If you know the system under "Owners Online" at http:// destination, the address can be downloaded. www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

The system has not been able to initiate an MB Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations Sto wag Info call, if: in the vicinity. Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï Furthermore, you can download routes with up is flashing continuously. to four way points. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz You are prompted to confirm route guidance to Customer Assistance Center was estab- the address entered. lished. X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net- the controller and confirm with 7. work is not available, for example. The system calculates the route and subse- The Call Failed message appears in the mul- quently starts the route guidance with the tifunction display. address entered. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the If you select No the address can be stored in multifunction steering wheel. the address book. or The destination download function is available X Press the corresponding multimedia system if: button for ending a phone call. Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Call priority Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call Route Assistance can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package call will take priority and override all other active and cannot be purchased separately. calls.

Z 250 Features

You can use the route assistance function even A display message appears, asking whether if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation navigation should be started. system. X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 Within the framework of this service, you receive the controller and confirm with 7. a professional and reliable form of navigation The system calculates the route and subse- support without having to leave your vehicle. quently starts the route guidance with the The customer service representative finds a address entered. suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur- If you select No the address can be stored in rent position and the desired destination. You the address book. will then be guided live through the current route If you have sent more than one destination section. address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Search & Send Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. General notes If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. If multiple vehicles are registered under the Additionally, an mbrace service subscription same e-mail address, the destination will be must be completed. sent to all the vehicles. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Vehicle remote opening Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system. You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a Specifying and sending the destination replacement SmartKey is not available. address The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- X Go to the website http://maps.google.com Benz Customer Assistance Center. Stowage and features and enter a destination address into the entry The vehicle can be immediately opened field. remotely within four days of the ignition being X To send the destination address to the e- turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking mail address of your mbrace account: may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After click on the corresponding button on the web- 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened site. remotely. Example: The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa- If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will able and a data connection is possible. be sent to your vehicle. X Contact the following service hotlines: X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Enter the e-mail address you specified when at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) setting up your mbrace account into the cor- or 1-866-990-9007 responding field. You will be asked for your password. X Click "Send". X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon Information on specific commands such as with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the tance Center. website. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: R Calling up a transmitted destination the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- address tion Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®, X 2 Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition Android) lock (Y page 128). The transmitted destination address is loaded To do this, you will need your identification num- into the vehicle's navigation system. ber and password. Features 251

Vehicle remote closing Vehicle Health Check The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and Assistance Center can provide improved sup- you are no longer nearby. port for problems with your vehicle. During an The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes- existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Benz Customer Assistance Center. Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked The customer service representative can use within four days of the ignition being turned off. the received data to decide what kind of assis- After this time, remote closing may be delayed tance is required. You are then, for example, by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes- can no longer be locked remotely. Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an the relevant mobile phone network is available MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is and a data connection is possible. initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. X Contact the following service hotlines: The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐ at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ or 1-866-990-9007 cle diagnostics? message appears in the You will be asked for your password. display. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked X Remotely message appears in the multifunction When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please display. Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: (Y page 128). Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec- X If the Please follow the instructions tion received by phone and move your vehi‐ Stowage and features Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®, cle to a safe position. message Android) appears: please follow the instructions To do this, you will need your identification num- received by phone and move your vehicle to a ber and password. safe position. The message in the display disappears. Stolen vehicle recovery service The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ If your vehicle has been stolen: cle Diagnostics Active message. X Notify the police. If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health The police will issue a numbered incident Check is canceled completely. report. When the check is complete, the Sending X This number will be forwarded to the vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center nection may be interrupted during together with your PIN. data transfer) message appears. The vehicle The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance data can now be sent. Center then tries to locate the system. The X Press the OK button to confirm the message. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center The voice connection with the Customer contacts you and the local law enforcement Assistance Center is terminated. agency if the vehicle is located. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ However, only the law enforcement agency is ring Data... message appears. informed of the location of the vehicle. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for Assistance Center. longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Depending on what the customer service rep- Customer Assistance Center is automatically resentative agreed with you, the voice connec- notified. Z 252 Features

tion is re-established after the transfer is com- tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a then forwards this information to you. later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or You can select the way in which you receive this phone. information beforehand. Possible options Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is include text message, e-mail or an automated the transfer of service data to the Customer call. Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display The data you receive contains the following shows a message to this effect together with information: information about any special offers at your R workshop. the location where the speed limit was exceeded This information can also be called up under R "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. the time at which the speed limit was exceeded Information on the data stored in the vehicle R (Y page 29). the selected speed limit which was exceeded Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 26). Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the Downloading routes vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries Downloading routes allows you to transfer and of the selected areas. You can select the way in save predefined routes in the navigation sys-

d features which you receive this information beforehand. tem. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an A route can be prepared and sent by either a an automated call. e customer service representative or under "Own- The area can be determined as either a circle or ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You Each route can include up to four way points. can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif- Once a route has been received by the naviga- ferent settings are possible for each area.

Sto wag tion system, you will see the External desti‐ These settings can be called up under "Owners nation ICON_POI_Category Name_1 has Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. been saved to "Previous destina‐ Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and tions". Would you like to start navi‐ inform the customer service representative that gation? message on the multimedia system you wish to activate geo fencing. display. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text The route is saved. message. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the dis- Triggering the vehicle alarm play. If you select No, the saved route can be called With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's up later in the navigation menu. panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds X Select Start. and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on Starting route guidance. the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. You can find further information in the separate Garage door opener multimedia system operating instructions. General notes Speed alert The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated You can define the upper speed limit, which in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up must not be exceeded by the vehicle. to three different door and gate systems. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assis- Features 253

Use the integrated garage door opener only on these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There garage doors that: is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave Rhave safety stop and reverse features and the engine running in enclosed spaces with- Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards out sufficient ventilation. Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the Programming function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. Programming buttons When programming a garage door opener, park Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the (Y page 253). engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 A R ® Garage door remote control is not included HomeLink hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of with the integrated garage door opener. charge) X 2 ® Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignition More information on HomeLink and/or com- lock (Y page 128). Stowage and features patible products is also available online at X ; ? http://www.homelink.com. Select one of buttons to to use to control the garage door drive. Notes on the declaration of conformity X To start programming mode: (Y page 27). press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 garage door opener. Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator Important safety notes lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as G WARNING button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. When you operate or program the garage door If the selected button has already been pro- : with the integrated garage door opener, per- grammed, indicator lamp will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. sons in the range of movement of the garage X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator door can become trapped or struck by the lamp : flashes yellow. garage door. There is a risk of injury. X To program the remote control: point When using the integrated garage door garage door remote control A towards but- opener, always make sure that nobody is tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis- within the range of movement of the garage tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). door. X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. G WARNING When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

Z 254 Features

When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- Notes on programming the remote con- gramming was successful. The next step is to trol synchronize the rolling code (Y page 254). Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" X Release button B on remote control A for (or interruption) of the transmission signals the garage door drive system. after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the these signals may not last long enough for the programing procedure for the corresponding integrated garage door opener. The signal is not button on the rear-view mirror. When doing recognized during programming. Comparable so, vary the distance between remote control with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open- A and the rear-view mirror. ers also feature a "break". The required distance between remote con- Proceed as follows: trol A and the integrated garage door opener R depends on the garage door drive system. if you live in Canada Several attempts might be necessary. You Rif you have difficulties programming the should test every position for at least garage door opener (regardless of where you 25 seconds before trying another position. live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the Synchronizing the rolling code integrated garage door opener. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up (Y page 253). yellow. If the garage door system uses a rolling code, X Release the button. you will also have to synchronize the garage Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. door system with the integrated garage door X Press button B of garage door remote con- opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will trol A for two seconds, then release it for two need to use the programming button on the door seconds. drive control panel. The programming button X Press button B again for two seconds. may be located in different places depending on X B the manufacturer. It is usually located on the Repeat this sequence on button of remote

Stowage and features A : door drive unit on the garage ceiling. control until indicator lamp lights up green. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro- operating instructions, e.g. under "Program- gramming is finished. ming additional remote controls", before carry- : ing out the following steps. When indicator lamp flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage synchronize the rolling code. door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei- X B A ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are Release button of remote control of the present within the sweep of the door or gate. garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition programming process for the corresponding lock (Y page 128). button on the rear-view mirror. When doing X Get out of the vehicle. so, vary the distance between remote control X Press the programming button on the door A and the rear-view mirror. drive unit. The required distance between remote con- Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate trol A and the integrated garage door opener the next step. depends on the garage door drive system. X Get into the vehicle. Several attempts might be necessary. You X should test every position for at least Press previously programmed button ;, = 25 seconds before trying another position. or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Features 255

Problems when programming Garage door system with a rolling code: indi- If you are experiencing problems programing cator lamp : flashes green. the integrated garage door opener on the rear- The transmitter will transmit a signal as long view mirror, take note of the following instruc- as the button is pressed. The transmission is tions: halted after a maximum of ten seconds and R indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Check the transmitter frequency used by X garage door drive remote control A and Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of Clearing the memory the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is com- Make sure that you clear the memory of the patible with devices that have units which integrated garage door opener before selling the operate in the frequency range of 280 to vehicle. 433 MHz. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition RReplace the batteries in garage door remote lock (Y page 128). control A. This increases the likelihood that X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. garage door remote control A will transmit a The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow strong and precise signal to the integrated and then green. garage door opener. X Release buttons ; and ?. RWhen programming, hold remote control A The memory of the integrated garage door at varying distances and angles from the but- opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. ton which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. Floormats RIf another remote control is available for the G WARNING same garage door drive, repeat the same pro-

gramming steps with this remote control. Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the Stowage and features Before performing these steps, make sure pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. that new batteries have been installed in The operating and road safety of the vehicle is garage door drive remote control A. jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. R Note that some remote controls only transmit Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are for a limited amount of time (the indicator stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before the driver's footwell. Install the floormats transmission ends. securely and as specified in order to ensure RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use opener unit. This can improve signal recep- loose floormats and do not place floormats on tion/transmission. top of one another.

Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Z 256 Features

X Slide the seat backwards. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. Stowage and features Engine compartment 257

Engine compartment Rremove jewelry and watches R Hood keep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection sys- If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when tem work under high voltage. If you touch the vehicle is in motion and block your view. components which are under voltage, you There is a risk of an accident. could get an electric shock. There is a risk of Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before injury. every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition G WARNING is switched on. When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is Opening the hood a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. G WARNING Open and close the hood only when no one is Certain components in the engine compart- within its range of movement. ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. G WARNING Working in the engine compartment poses a Opening the hood when the engine is over- risk of injury. heated or when there is a fire in the engine Where possible, let the engine cool down and compartment could expose you to hot gases touch only the components described in the or other service products. There is a risk of following. injury. G Let an overheated engine cool down before WARNING Maintenance and care opening the hood. If there is a fire in the When the hood is open and the windshield engine compartment, keep the hood closed wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by and contact the fire department. the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood. The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are the radiator fan, may continue to run or start not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wip- again suddenly when the ignition is off. There ers or the hood. is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area

Z 258 Engine compartment

be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started X Make sure that the windshield wipers are briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying turned off. out the measurement. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick

Closing the hood X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide with a little more force. tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube Engine oil to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX General notes mark ;, the oil level is correct. Depending on your driving style, the vehicle X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may Engine compartment 259

Adding engine oil

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Example G WARNING X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. If engine oil comes into contact with hot com- X Add engine oil. ponents in the engine compartment, it may If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. oil. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and clockwise. thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. ponents before starting the engine. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 258). H Environmental note Further information on engine oil (Y page 315). When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. Additional service products

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have Checking coolant level been approved for vehicles with a service sys- G Maintenance and care tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oils WARNING and oil filters tested and approved in accord- Certain components in the engine compart- ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Service center. Working in the engine compartment poses a Damage to the engine or exhaust system is risk of injury. caused by the following: Where possible, let the engine cool down and Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service touch only the components described in the system following. R replacing engine oil and oil filters after the G interval for replacement specified by the WARNING service system has been exceeded The cooling system is pressurized, particularly Rusing engine oil additives. when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. engine oil can result in damage to the engine There is a risk of injury. or to the catalytic converter. Have excess Let the engine cool down before you open the engine oil siphoned off. cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure.

Z 260 Maintenance

Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of X Park the vehicle on a level surface. fire and injury. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle Make sure that no windshield washer con- is on a level surface and the engine has cooled centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 128). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and X Add the premixed washer fluid. remove it. Maintenance and care If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck in the filler neck when cold, there is enough until it engages. coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the washer fluid level drops below the recom- If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck in the multifunction display prompting you to when warm, there is enough coolant in expan- add washer fluid (Y page 223). sion tank ;. Further information on windshield washer fluid/ X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested antifreeze (Y page 316). and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. Maintenance For further information on coolant, see (Y page 316). ASSYST PLUS Service messages Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. G WARNING Information on the type of service and service Certain components in the engine compart- intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book- let). ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Maintenance 261

You can obtain further information from an Information about Service authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter- i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display val display does not show any information on the engine ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil has been inadvertently reset, this setting can level (Y page 258). be corrected at a qualified specialist work- The multifunction display shows a service mes- shop. sage for several seconds, e.g.: Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise RService A in .. days lead to increased wear and damage to the RService A Due major assemblies or the vehicle. RService A Exceeded by .. Days A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author- Depending on the operating conditions of the ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the next service due date is displayed. service work has been carried out. You can also The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a obtain further information on maintenance number or another letter, indicates the type of work, for example. service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. Special service requirements You can obtain further information from an The specified maintenance interval takes only authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the normal operation of the vehicle into The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does account. Under arduous operating conditions or not take into account any periods of time during increased load on the vehicle, maintenance which the battery is disconnected. work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Maintaining the time-dependent service sched- ule: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate X stops Note down the service due date displayed in R the multifunction display before disconnect- if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances ing the battery. Maintenance and care R or use in mountainous terrain or on poor road X surfaces After reconnecting the battery, subtract the R battery disconnection periods from the ser- if the engine is often left idling for long periods vice date shown on the display. Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under Hiding a service message arduous operating conditions, the tires must be X Press the a or % button on the steering checked more often. Further information can be wheel. obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying service messages Driving abroad X An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is Switch on the ignition. also available in other countries. You can obtain X Press the = or ; button on the steering further information from any authorized wheel to select the Serv. menu. Mercedes-Benz Center. X Press the 9 or : button to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the multifunction display.

Z 262 Care

Care ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in General notes certain situations. H To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate Environmental note DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning the following or other similar situations: cloths in an environmentally responsible man- Rwhen towing the vehicle ner. Rin the car wash ! ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of Preferably use automatic car washes with the following: adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. This corresponds with the specification for the R dry, rough or hard cloths Cabriolet program. In car washes that use Rabrasive cleaning agents high water pressures, there is a risk that a Rsolvents small amount of water may leak into the vehi- Rcleaning agents containing solvents cle. Do not scrub. ! Make sure that the vehicle is not subse- Do not touch the surfaces or protective films quently treated with hot wax. with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless You could otherwise scratch or damage the Automatic Car Wash as these use special surfaces and protective film. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended damage the paintwork or plastic parts. period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Make sure that: after having cleaned the wheels with wheel R cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause the side windows and the sliding sunroof or increased corrosion of the brake discs and soft top are fully closed. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. OFF button has been pressed). Braking heats the brake discs and the brake Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0. pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle

Maintenance and care Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. can then be parked. ! Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for In car washes with a towing mechanism, retaining the quality in the long term. make sure that the automatic transmission is in transmission position N, otherwise the Use care products and cleaning agents recom- vehicle could be damaged. mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. RVehicles with a SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni- Washing the vehicle and cleaning the tion lock. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine is paintwork switched off. Otherwise, the automatic P Automatic car wash transmission selects park position automatically and locks the wheels. You can G WARNING prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N beforehand. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not open the driver's door or front- After the vehicle has been washed, brake passenger door when the engine is carefully while paying attention to the traffic switched off. Otherwise, the automatic conditions until full braking power is restored. transmission selects park position P automatically and locks the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N: Care 263

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the to the tires or chassis components. Compo- ignition is switched off. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition edly. There is a risk of an accident. lock (Y page 128). Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop Do not use power washers with circular jet button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged X Depress and hold the brake pedal. tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Shift the automatic transmission to position diately. N. ! X Release the brake pedal. Always maintain a distance of at least X 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the Release the parking brake. power washer nozzle. Information about the X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey correct distance is available from the equip- in the ignition lock. ment manufacturer. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car Move the power washer nozzle around when wash from the very start. cleaning your vehicle. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before Do not aim directly at any of the following: cleaning it in an automatic car wash. RTires After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax RDoor gaps, joints etc. from the windshield and the wiper blades. This R will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises Soft top caused by residue on the windshield. RWind deflector net RElectrical components Washing by hand RBattery RConnectors In some countries, washing by hand is only R allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Lights Observe the legal requirements in each country. RSeals X Do not use hot water and do not wash the RTrim elements vehicle in direct sunlight. RVentilation slots

X Use a soft sponge to clean. Damaged seals or electrical components can Maintenance and care X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car lead to leaks or failures. shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen- Cleaning the paintwork tle jet of water. ! Do not affix: X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. Rstickers X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge Rfilms frequently. Rmagnetic plates or similar items X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry to painted surfaces. You could otherwise thoroughly with a chamois. damage the paintwork. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint- Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by work. corrosion and damage caused by inadequate Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as care cannot always be completely repaired. In soon as possible when driving in winter. such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, Power washers while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and G WARNING rinse off the treated areas afterwards. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage the treated areas afterwards.

Z 264 Care

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, i The vehicle should preferably be washed by fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter plenty of water. fluid. i X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of recommended and X Use silicone remover to remove wax. approved Mercedes-Benz care products. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the Cleaning the vehicle parts case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the Cleaning the soft top care product used. ! If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the Never use any of the following to clean the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom- soft top: mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz Rgasoline should be used. Rthinner Do not use these care products in the sun or on Rtar or stain remover the hood while the hood is hot. Rother organic solvents X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch- Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint- ! Remove bird droppings immediately as they work quickly and provisionally. are corrosive and, therefore, can make the soft-top fabric leak. Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment to clean the vehicle. Do Matte finish care not use sharp-edged equipment to remove ice ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy and snow. wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. X Light soiling: you can clean the soft top while ! it is dry or rinse it with clear water. The following may cause the paint to X become shiny and thus reduce the matte Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft top effect: with a brush and clear water. Clean stains and

Maintenance and care other dirt with a brush and soft top cleaning R strong rubbing of the paintwork with agents that have been recommended and unsuitable materials approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always brush Rfrequent use of automatic car washes from front to back, following the grain of the Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight fabric. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resist- products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These ance to dirt. products are only suitable for high-gloss sur- To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the soft faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish top using soft top cleaning agents that have leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, been recommended and approved by mottled areas). Mercedes-Benz. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging, qualified specialist workshop. can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have the ! soft-top seams sealed at a qualified specialist Do not use wash programs with a hot wax workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz treatment under any circumstances. Center. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear i Cover the soft top appropriately if you plan matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to leave the vehicle outside for a long period to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. of time. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. Care 265

Cleaning AIRCAP Cleaning the AIRCAP wind screen Clean the AIRCAP wind screen with the soft top Cleaning the wind deflector open. ! Do not use high-pressure cleaning equip- X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the SmartKey ment to clean the net. to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). Clean the wind deflector on the windshield with X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the the soft top closed. Start/Stop button twice (Y page 128). X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Open the soft top (Y page 86). X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 128). X Open the cover in the lower center console. The AIRCAP button is under the cover.

X Press rear seat head restraints button :. The rear seat head restraints and AIRCAP wind screen rise upwards.

X Press AIRCAP button :. The wind deflector between the windshield and the soft top is extended. Maintenance and care

X Clean net ; of the AIRCAP wind screen with a moist cloth together with the care and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wheels X Clean net ; of the wind deflector with a soft brush or a moist cloth. For heavier soiling, G WARNING clean it with the care and cleaning agents The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz and rinse it with clean water. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- nents damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 266 Care

Do not use power washers with circular jet Cleaning wiper blades nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged G WARNING tires or chassis components replaced immediately. You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of to remove brake dust. This could damage injury. wheel bolts and brake components. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended the ignition before cleaning the windshield or period straight after cleaning it, particularly wiper blades. after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the increased corrosion of the brake discs and wiper blade could be damaged. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do Braking heats the brake discs and the brake not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph- pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle ite coating could be damaged. This could can then be parked. cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding Cleaning the windows back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. G WARNING X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the You could become trapped by the windshield windshield. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of cloth. injury. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again Always switch off the windshield wipers and before switching on the ignition. the ignition before cleaning the windshield or

Maintenance and care wiper blades. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- which are suitable for plastic light lenses. vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths not touch the insides of the windows with could scratch or damage the plastic light len- hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There ses. is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light- ! ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning Clean the water drainage channels of the agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or windshield and the rear window at regular cleaning cloths. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead Mirror turn signals to corrosion damage and damage to elec- ! tronic components. Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths X that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable Clean the inside and outside of the windows cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the is recommended and approved by Mercedes- mirror turn signals. Benz. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Care 267

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning Cleaning the 360° camera cloths. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the 360° camera with a power Cleaning the sensors washer.360 ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the X : Clean sensors of the driving systems with exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow

water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Maintenance and care these components to cool down before touching them. Cleaning the rear view camera ! ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- around the rear view camera with a power based cleaning agents, such as bathroom washer. cleaner or wheel cleaner. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :.

Z 268 Care

Interior care Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever Cleaning the display X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: leather care agents that have been recom- Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- agents ments These may damage the display surface. Do ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents not put pressure on the display surface when such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam- or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag- age to the display. ing the surface. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it ! is switched off and has cooled down. Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. X The trim pieces have a chrome look but are Clean the display surface using a commer- mostly made of anodized aluminum and can cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use display cleaner. a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber the trim pieces. cloth. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are Cleaning the plastic trim unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized G WARNING Mercedes-Benz Center. Care products and cleaning agents containing X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. become porous. As a result, plastic parts may X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning come loose in the event of air bag deploy- products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Maintenance and care ment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning Cleaning the seat covers agents to clean the cockpit. General notes ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers Rstickers made out of real leather, artificial leather or R films DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage Rscented oil bottles or similar items the cover. You can otherwise damage the plastic. i Note that regular care is essential to ensure ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or that the appearance and comfort of the cov- sunscreen to come into contact with the plas- ers is retained over time. tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Genuine leather seat covers X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Leather is a natural product. cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod- example: R ucts recommended and approved by differences in the texture Mercedes-Benz. Rmarks caused by growth and injury The surface may change color temporarily. Rslight nuances of color Wait until the surface is dry again. These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Care 269

! To retain the natural appearance of the Cleaning the headliner and carpets leather, observe the following cleaning X instructions: Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. RClean genuine leather covers carefully with X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Maintenance and care Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.

Z 270 Flat tire

Where will I find...? Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Vehicle tool kit Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 270) Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 308) General notes Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It well under the trunk floor (Y page 243). is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from spare wheel a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 303). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. : "Minispare" emergency spare wheel X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. ; Vehicle tool kit tray or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: = Stowage well X Open the driver's door. X Open the trunk lid. The on-board electronics now have status 0. X Y This is the same as the SmartKey having been Lift the trunk floor upwards ( page 243). removed. The vehicle tool kit contains: X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- RStraps for emergency release of the Cabriolet tion lock (Y page 128). soft top X Make sure that the passengers are not endan- R gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is Breakdown assistance Folding wheel chock RFuse allocation chart near the danger area while a wheel is being R changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting Jack in the wheel change should, for example, RAlignment bolt stand behind the barrier. ROne pair of gloves X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic RLug wrench conditions when doing so. RTowing eye X Close the driver's door. i Example: equipment and country-specific variations possible. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) Flat tire General notes Preparing the vehicle With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- Your vehicle may be equipped with: acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper- Y or more tires. The affected tire must not show ties) ( page 270) any clearly visible damage. Flat tire 271

You can recognize MOExtended tires by the Important safety notes MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking G WARNING next to the tire size designation, the load-bear- When driving in emergency mode, the driving ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 298). characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. tion with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears There is a risk of an accident. in the multifunction display: Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Robserve the instructions in the display mes- Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, sages (Y page 219). and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, Rcheck the tire for damage. off-road). This applies in particular to a laden Rif driving on, observe the following notes. vehicle. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is Stop driving in emergency mode if: approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi- Ryou hear banging noises. cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully R laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). the vehicle starts to shake. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. tance possible depends upon: RESP® is intervening constantly. R vehicle speed Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. R road condition After driving in emergency mode, have the R outside temperature wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist The driving distance possible in run-flat mode workshop with regard to their further use. The may be reduced by extreme driving conditions defective tire must be replaced in every case. or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss TIREFIT kit warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of Important safety notes 50 mph (80 km/h). TIREFIT is a tire sealant.

When replacing one or all tires, please observe You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to Breakdown assistance the following specifications for your vehicle's 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tires: tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera- Rsize tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). R the type and G WARNING Rthe "MOExtended" mark In the following situations, the tire sealant is If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis- used as a temporary measure. Make sure that tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: you use the proper size and type (summer or Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger winter tire). than those mentioned above. Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are R not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It the wheel rim is damaged. is therefore recommended that you additionally Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount on a flat tire. tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. There is a risk of an accident. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 272 Flat tire

G WARNING compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 270). The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita- X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the tion. It must not come into contact with your instrument cluster within the driver's field of skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not vision. inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the from children. There is a risk of injury. valve on the wheel with the defective tire. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. X Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A RImmediately change out of clothing which out of the tire inflation compressor housing. has come into contact with tire sealant. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical bottle :. attention immediately. X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation compres- ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor sor. for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation com- Breakdown assistance pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 245) in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 128). X Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation compressor to I. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have The tire inflation compressor is switched on. penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. The tire is inflated. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa- nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation Flat tire 273

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The Tire pressure reached pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). G WARNING Do not switch off the tire inflation com- A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant pressor during this phase. impairs the driving characteristics and is not X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of maximum of five minutes. The tire should then accident. have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). You should therefore adapt your driving style If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres- the specified maximum speed with a tire that sure reached" (Y page 273). has been repaired using tire sealant. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire pressure not reached" (Y page 273). sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru- If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected ment cluster in the driver's field of vision. areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. ! After use, excess tire sealant may run out of If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have the filler hose. This could cause stains. them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with cleaner as soon as possible. filler hose in the plastic bag which is contained in the TIREFIT kit. Tire pressure not reached H Environmental note If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of been attained after five minutes: professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. workshop. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has Note that tire sealant may escape when you been attained after five minutes: unscrew the filler hose. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx- X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the

imately 30 ft (10 m). faulty tire. Breakdown assistance X Pump up the tire again. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla- After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres- tion compressor. sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ X Pull away immediately. 26 psi). X Stop after driving for approximately ten G WARNING minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. If the required tire pressure is not reached The tire pressure must now be at least after the specified time, the tire is too badly 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the G WARNING tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly If the required tire pressure is not reached impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- after driving for a short period, the tire is too acteristics. There is a risk of accident. badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a specialist workshop. tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Z 274 Battery (vehicle)

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified Battery (vehicle) specialist workshop. Important safety notes i In cases such as the one mentioned above, Special tools and expert knowledge are required contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- when working on the battery, e.g. removal and ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the installation. You should therefore have all work USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). involving the battery carried out at a qualified X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least specialist workshop. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and G WARNING Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the Work carried out incorrectly on the battery fuel filler flap for values. can lead, for example, to a short circuit and X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can tire inflation compressor. lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking

tance Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres- There is a risk of an accident.

wn assis sure release button E next to pressure gauge In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- F. dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the immediately. Do not drive any further. You filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. should have all work involving the battery car- X

Breakdo Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. sealed tire. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla- For further information about ABS (Y page 62) tion compressor. and ESP® (Y page 66). The filler hose remains attached to the tire G WARNING sealant bottle. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an replaced as soon as possible at a qualified explosion. specialist workshop. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every body to remove any existing electrostatic four years at a qualified specialist workshop. build-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Battery (vehicle) 275

Always make sure that neither you nor the bat- must be collected separately tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of and recycled to protect the electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: environment. Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic Dispose of batteries in an fibers environmentally friendly Rdue to friction between clothing and seats manner. Take discharged Rif you push or pull the battery across the car- batteries to a qualified spe- pet or other synthetic materials cialist workshop or a special Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth collection point for used batteries. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produ- ! Have the battery checked regularly at a ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or qualified specialist workshop. sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can Observe the service intervals in the Mainte- ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- ! Always have work on batteries carried out at tact with vehicle parts. a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in R exceptional circumstances, be absolutely Never place metal objects or tools on a bat- necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery tery. yourself, observe the following: R It is important that you observe the descri- Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling tance bed order of the battery terminals when away. connecting and disconnecting a battery. Rswitch off the ignition. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the Ralways disconnect the negative terminal battery poles with identical polarity are clamp first, followed by the positive termi- connected. nal clamp. wn assis RIt is particularly important to observe the After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P. described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. After the work has been done, install the bat-

tery and replace the cover of the positive ter- Breakdo RNever connect or disconnect the battery minal clamp firmly. terminals while the engine is running. Comply with safety precautions and take pro- G tective measures when handling batteries. WARNING Risk of explosion. Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over Fire, open flames and smoking are the battery. Keep children away from batter- prohibited when handling the bat- ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with tery. Avoid creating sparks. plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. H Environmental note Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and face- Batteries contain dangerous guard. substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They

Z 276 Battery (vehicle)

Rinse any acid spills immediately Charging the battery with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. G WARNING Wear eye protection. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Keep children away. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Observe this Operator's Manual. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do mends that you only use batteries which have not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over been tested and approved for your vehicle by the battery. Keep children away from batter- Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with occupants from suffering acid burns should the plenty of clean water and seek medical atten- battery be damaged in the event of an accident. tion. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be suffi- G WARNING ciently charged. A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may tures below freezing point. When jump-start- discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also can escape from the battery. There is a risk of charge the battery with a charger recommended an explosion. by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special- Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before ist workshop for further information. charging it or jump-starting. Have the battery condition of charge checked

Breakdown assistance more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a charging voltage of 14.8 V. lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle ! Only charge the battery using the jump- parked for a long period of time. starting connection point. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle The jump-starting connection point is in the and do not require any electrical consumers. engine compartment (Y page 278). The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus X Open the hood. conserving battery power. X Connect the battery charger to the positive If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if terminal and ground point in the same order you reconnect the battery, you will have to: as when connecting the donor battery in the Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock jump-starting procedure (Y page 278). can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at On vehicles with a multimedia system, the low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis- time is set automatically. charged battery has frozen. In this case, you Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir- may neither charge the battery nor jump-start rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir- the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out bat- rors out once (Y page 106) tery may be shorter. The starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low tempera- Battery (vehicle) 277 tures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Never charge a battery still installed in the vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. Breakdown assistance

Z 278 Jump-starting

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. R

Breakdown assistance Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 279

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump- start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Apply the parking brake firmly. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 128). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Breakdown assistance

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.

Z 280 Towing and tow-starting

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden- Important safety notes tification plate (Y page 311). ! G WARNING When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Functions relevant to safety are restricted or is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically no longer available if: in certain situations. Rthe engine is not running. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit- R the brake system or the power steering is uations: malfunctioning. Rwhen towing the vehicle R there is a malfunction in the voltage supply Rin the car wash or the vehicle's electrical system. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the If your vehicle is being towed, much more towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be force may be necessary to steer or brake. damaged. There is a risk of an accident. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this Breakdown assistance In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover make sure that the steering moves freely. the vehicle with a crane. ! G WARNING When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the When towing or tow-starting another vehicle vehicles could be damaged. and its weight is greater than the permissible ! gross weight of your vehicle, the: Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. Rthe towing eye could detach itself ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button. over. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition There is a risk of an accident. lock and shift the automatic transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 and When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, leave it in the ignition lock. its weight should not be greater than the per- ! missible gross weight of your vehicle. The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. Towing and tow-starting 281

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N In the event of damage to the electrical system The mountings for the removable towing eyes If the battery is defective, the automatic trans- are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear mission will be locked in position P. To shift the and at the front, under covers :. automatic transmission to position N, you must X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool provide power to the vehicle's electrical system kit (Y page 270). in the same way as when jump-starting X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the (Y page 278). direction of the arrow. Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or X Take cover : off the opening. trailer. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it Disarm the automatic locking feature before the will go and tighten it. vehicle is towed (Y page 79). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the Removing the towing eye vehicle. Breakdown assistance X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. X Position cover : on top of the bumper and Installing/removing the towing eye press it in at the bottom until it engages. X Installing the towing eye Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is Towing a vehicle with both axles on a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. the ground Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular It is important that you observe the safety care when removing the rear cover. instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 280). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.

Z 282 Fuses

X Release the brake pedal. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle X Release the parking brake. onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. In order to signal a change of direction when X towing the vehicle with the hazard warning Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lamps switched on, use the combination switch lock. as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps X Shift the automatic transmission to position for the direction of travel flash. After resetting N. the combination switch, the hazard warning As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: lamp starts flashing again. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- raised tion P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed lock and remove it. with either the front or the rear axle raised, as X Secure the vehicle. doing so will damage the transmission. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The Tow-starting (emergency engine vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise starting) swerve or even roll over. ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be started by tow-starting. This could oth- Transporting the vehicle erwise damage the transmission. i Vehicles with automatic transmission You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 278).

Fuses Important safety notes

Breakdown assistance G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on Always replace faulty fuses with the specified the same transportation vehicle. Positioning new fuses having the correct amperage. over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the otherwise be damaged. same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the All vehicles fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the tool kit in the stowage compartment under the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as trunk floor (Y page 270). axle or steering components. Otherwise, the If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the vehicle could be damaged. cause traced and rectified at a qualified special- Fuses 283 ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Dashboard fuse box Center. ! Pay attention to the important safety notes Only use fuses that have been approved for (Y page 282). Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw- Otherwise, components or systems could be driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You damaged. could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep- lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep- ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper- ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. ation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating.

Before changing a fuse Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 282). X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bot- (Y page 144). tom in the direction of arrow =. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: arrow ; and remove it. X Open the driver's door. X To close: clip in cover : on the front of the The on-board electronics now have status 0. dashboard. This is the same as the SmartKey having been X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. Breakdown assistance removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- Y tion lock ( page 128). Fuse box in the engine compartment All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 282). The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: G RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard WARNING RFuse box in the engine compartment on the When the hood is open and the windshield left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the direction of travel the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. R Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel the ignition before opening the hood.

Z 284 Fuses

X Open the trunk lid. X To open: raise trunk floor : (Y page 243). X Slightly push back floor covering with slits ; at gap = and lift it up.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood (Y page 257). X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: remove lines ; from the guides. X Move lines ; aside. Route the lines behind connection = to do this. X Open clamp :. X Remove the fuse box cover forwards. X To close: check whether the seal is lying correctly in the cover. X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into the retainer. X Fold down cover and close clamps :. X Secure lines ; in the guides. X Close the hood.

Breakdown assistance Fuse box in the trunk Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 282). Operation 285

Important safety notes Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 307). G WARNING You can ask for information regarding permitted If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, wheel-tire combinations at an authorized the wheel brakes or suspension components Mercedes-Benz Center. may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Information on tire pressure can be found: dent. Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Always replace wheels and tires with those on the B-pillar on the driver's side Y that fulfill the specifications of the original ( page 294) R part. in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 142) When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 288) correct: Rdesignation Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the Information on driving correct: Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is Rdesignation heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. Rmanufacturer While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises Rmodel and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that G WARNING a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi- A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden There is a risk of accident. tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of Tires without run-flat characteristics: damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a Rdo not drive with a flat tire. qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over consult a qualified specialist workshop. obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse

Tires with run-flat characteristics: angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels Wheels and tires or tires. Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Regular checking of wheels and tires Accessories that are not approved for your vehi- G WARNING cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- Before purchasing and using non-approved sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. shop and ask about: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage Rsuitability and replace any damaged tires immediately. Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations

Z 286 Operation

Check wheels and tires for damage at least once Minimum tire tread depth for: a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) attention to damage such as: For safety reasons, replace the tires before R cuts in the tires the legally prescribed limit for the minimum R punctures tire tread depth is reached. Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 286). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure Marking : shows where the bar indicator monitoring systems. (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par- tread. ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres- Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. sure as necessary (Y page 288). Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. Observe the notes on the emergency spare They are visible once a tread depth of approx- wheel (Y page 308). imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be The service life of tires depends, among other replaced. things, on the following factors: Rdriving style Rtire pressure Selecting, mounting and replacing Rdistance covered tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Wheels and tires Notes on tire tread Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- G WARNING ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 270). The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk wheels. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- first 60 miles(100 km). They only reach their ditions. There is a risk of accident. full performance after this distance. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires RDo not drive with tires which have too little may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you R should regularly check the tread depth and Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. the condition of the tread across the entire Observe the notes on the emergency spare width of all tires. wheel (Y page 308). Winter operation 287

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat M+S tires properties) G WARNING With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char- M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter or more tires. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc- a risk of an accident. tion with an active tire pressure monitor and M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in only on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes- (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter flat tire (Y page 270). tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are identified by the M+S marking. not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake is therefore recommended that you additionally symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in a qualified specialist workshop. winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all Winter operation wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. General notes Always observe the maximum permissible Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified speed specified for the M+S tires you have specialist workshop at the onset of winter. mounted. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" Once the winter tires are mounted: Y section ( page 303). X Check the tire pressures (Y page 291). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 291). Driving with summer tires For more information on driving with the emer- At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer gency spare wheel, see (Y page 308). tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold Snow chains Wheels and tires temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. G WARNING Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. If snow chains are installed to the front G wheels, they may drag against the vehicle WARNING body or chassis components. This could Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of There is a risk of an accident. your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Check the tires regularly for signs of damage Rnever install snow chains to the front and replace any damaged tires immediately. wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

Z 288 Tire pressure

! On some tire sizes there is not enough space Tire pressure for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com- Tire pressure specifications binations" section under "Tires and wheels". Important safety notes ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount snow chains on steel wheels, you may dam- G WARNING age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before mounting the Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the snow chains. following risks: For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load mends that you only use snow chains that have and vehicle speed increase. been specially approved for your vehicle by Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, unevenly, which may greatly impair tire please contact a qualified specialist workshop. traction. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer- the following points in mind: ing and braking, may be greatly impaired. RSnow chains may not be mounted on all There is a risk of an accident. wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel- Follow recommended tire inflation pressures tire combinations (Y page 307). and check the pressure of all the tires includ- ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads ing the spare wheel: completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you Rmonthly, at least come to a road that is not snow-covered. Rif the load changes R Local regulations may restrict the use of snow R chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if before beginning a long journey you wish to mount snow chains. Runder different operating conditions, e.g. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible off-road driving speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). If necessary, correct the tire pressure. i You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed The data on the Tire and Loading Information (Y page 196). You can thereby allow the placard and tire pressure table shown here are wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi- ieving an increased driving force (cutting cle-specific and may deviate from the data action). shown here. The tire pressure specifications Wheels and tires that are valid for your vehicle can be found on For more information on driving with the emer- the Tire and Loading Information placard and gency spare wheel, see (Y page 308). tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with an emergency spare wheel: information on operation with an emergency spare wheel can be found in the general notes in the "Emergency spare wheel" section (Y page 308). Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure 289

Tire and Loading Information placard

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num- : Recommended tire pressures bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The The Tire and Loading Information placard is on actual number of seats may differ. the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 294). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 298). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Wheels and tires Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or The tire pressure table contains the recommen- higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- table, may have a negative effect on driving ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- comfort. ditions. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol- lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud- lowing tire pressure information is only valid for den loss of pressure. that tire size; see illustration (example). For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 290 Tire pressure

Important notes on tire pressure too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are G WARNING warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the reduce the tire pressure to the value specified wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise pressure that is too low may result in a tire be too low. blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tire pressures for RCheck the tire for foreign objects. cold tires: RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard valve is leaking. on the B-pillar on the driver's side R If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 142) tact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Underinflated tires malfunction, which can cause tire pressure G WARNING loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This Tires with pressure that is too low can over- can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, risk of an accident. they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the brak- Only screw the standard valve cap or other ing properties and the driving characteristics. valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for There is a risk of an accident. your vehicle onto the tire valve. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire tires, including the spare wheel. pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire Underinflated tires may: pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec- Roverheat, leading to tire defects tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure R can be checked in the on-board computer. adversely affect handling R The tire temperature and pressure increase wear excessively and/or unevenly when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Wheels and tires on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- Overinflated tires sures when the tires are cold. G The tires are cold: WARNING Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires Tires with excessively high pressure can burst out of direct sunlight for at least three hours because they are damaged more easily by and road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than also suffer from irregular wear, which can 1 mile (1.6 km) severely impair the braking properties and the The tire temperature changes depending on the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the accident. tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take tires, including the spare wheel. this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is Tire pressure 291

Overinflated tires may: Checking tire pressures manually R increase the braking distance To determine and set the correct tire pressure, Radversely affect handling proceed as follows: R wear excessively and/or unevenly X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort checked. Rbe more susceptible to damage X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. Maximum tire pressures X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 288). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. : Example: maximum permissible tire pressure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure monitor inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when General notes adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 288). If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire cific and may deviate from the values in the pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon- illustration. itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are Checking the tire pressures installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the Important safety notes multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is Wheels and tires Observe the notes on tire pressure shown in the Service menu of the multifunction (Y page 288). display, see illustration (example). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 142) Rin the "Tire pressure" section For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 293).

Z 292 Tire pressure

Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal G WARNING low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), tions may occur for a variety of reasons, should be checked at least once a month including the installation of incompatible when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- the Tire and Loading Information placard on tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal- the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure function telltale after replacing one or more label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that vehicle has tires of a different size than the the replacement or alternate tires and wheels size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- mation placard or the tire pressure label, you erly. should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 288). Note that the correct tire pressure system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres- for the current operating situation must first be sure telltale when one or more of your tires taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, a substantial loss of pressure, the warning when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, threshold for the warning message is aligned to you should stop and check your tires as soon the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 293). The current pres- pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- sures are saved as new reference values. As a flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can result, a warning message will appear if the tire lead to tire failure. Underinflation also pre ssure drops significantly. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the ping ability. notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 288). Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance , and it is the driv- The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is er's responsibility to maintain correct tire penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a

Wheels and tires pressure, even if underinflation has not sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a reached the level to trigger illumination of the halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering TPMS low tire pressure telltale. movements. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the system is not operating properly. The TPMS warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates malfunction indicator is combined with the whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire low tire pressure telltale. When the system pressure monitor is malfunctioning: detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire flash for approximately a minute and then pressure on one or more tires is significantly remain continuously illuminated. This too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal- sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- functioning. cle is started as long as the malfunction Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a exists. minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. Tire pressure 293

In addition to the warning lamp, a message of the wheel that has been removed for a few appears in the multifunction display. Observe minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis- the information on display messages played for the position where the spare wheel is (Y page 219). mounted is not the same as the current tire It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction pressure of the emergency spare wheel. of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres- Tire pressure monitor warning mes- sure warning lamp flashing for approximately sages one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of loss in one or more tires, a warning message is driving. shown in the multifunction display. The yellow The tire pressure values indicated by the on- tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. board computer may differ from those meas- RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The appears in the multifunction display, the tire tire pressures shown by the on-board computer pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire refer to those measured at sea level. At high pressure must be corrected when the oppor- altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a tunity arises. pressure gauge are higher than those shown by RIf the Check Tires message appears in the the on-board computer. In this case, do not multifunction display, the tire pressure in one reduce the tire pressures. or more tires has dropped significantly. The The operation of the tire pressure monitor can tires must be checked. be affected by interference from radio transmit- RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way appears in the multifunction display, the tire radios) that may be being operated in or near the pressure in one or more tires is dropping sud- vehicle. denly. The tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the Checking the tire pressure electroni- display messages in the "Tires" section cally (Y page 219). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, in the ignition lock (Y page 128). the tire pressures may be displayed for the X wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified Press the = or ; button on the steering after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres- wheel to select the Service menu. sures are displayed for the correct positions. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Restarting the tire pressure monitor

X Press the a button. Wheels and tires The current tire pressure of each tire is shown When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all in the multifunction display. existing warning messages are deleted and the If the vehicle has been parked for over warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur- 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be rently set tire pressures as the reference values displayed after driving a few minutes for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure message appears. monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon- pressure. However, you can also define refer- itor automatically detects new wheels or new ence values manually as described here. The tire sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not pressure values. Tire Pressure Monitor Active possible, the X display message is shown instead of the tire Set the tire pressure to the value recommen- pressure display. The tire pressures are already ded for the corresponding driving situation on being monitored. the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 288). If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure

Z 294 Loading the vehicle

You can find more tire pressure values for Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the various operating conditions in the tire pres- maximum possible load. sure table inside the fuel filler flap Y (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is ( page 288). on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on and Loading Information placard shows the all four wheels. maximum permissible number of occu- X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 pants and the maximum permissible vehicle in the ignition lock. load. It also contains details of the tire sizes X Press the = or ; button on the steering and corresponding pressures for tires wheel to select the Service menu. mounted at the factory. X Press the 9 or : button to select (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B- Tire Pressure. pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross X Press the a button. vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the The multifunction display shows the current vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressures will be displayed fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle after driving a few minutes message. weight rating on the front and rear axle. X Press the : button. The maximum gross axle weight rating is The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ the maximum weight that can be carried by erence Values message appears in the mul- one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed tifunction display. the maximum load or the maximum gross If you wish to confirm the restart: axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. : B-pillar, driver's side Wheels and tires

Loading the vehicle Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Loading the vehicle 295

X Specification for maximum gross vehicle suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Safety Act of 1966". Information placard: "The combined weight of X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined occupants and cargo should never exceed weight of occupants and cargo should never XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load Tire and Loading Information placard. and luggage must not exceed the specified X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of value. the driver and passengers that will be riding in i The specifications shown on the Tire and your vehicle. Loading Information placard in the illustration X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the are examples. The maximum permissible driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific XXX lbs. and may differ from that in the illustration. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail- You can find the valid maximum permissible able amount of cargo and luggage load capa- gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals the Tire and Loading Information placard. 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is Number of seats 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Wheels and tires i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle- specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-

Z 296 Loading the vehicle

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 294). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in 5 3 1 the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1 occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2 Weight of the occu- Occupant 1: 150 lbs Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs pants (68 kg) (91 kg) (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs Occupant 2: 190 lbs (82 kg) (86 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs (73 kg) (68 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs

Wheels and tires (54 kg) Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants

Step 3 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) = weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg) Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) All about wheels and tires 297

Vehicle identification plate sponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Even if you have calculated the total cargo care- Quality grades can be found, where applicable, fully, you should still make sure that the gross on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight maximum section width. rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on Example: the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 294). RTreadwear grade: 200 Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating RTraction grade: AA (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas- RTemperature grade: A sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if All passenger car tires must conform to the stat- applicable) must not exceed the permissible utory safety requirements in addition to these gross vehicle weight. grades. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- one axle (front or rear axle). cific and may deviate from the values in the To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the illustration. maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), Treadwear have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) The treadwear grade is a comparative rating weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well All about wheels and tires on the government course as a tire graded 100. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- The relative performance of tires depends upon ards the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and cli- ards mate.

Traction

G WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is Wheels and tires based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to The traction grades – from highest to lowest – provide drivers with uniform reliable information are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas- have to grade tires using three performance fac- ured under controlled conditions on specified tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and government test surfaces of asphalt and con- = temperature grade. These regulations do not crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in performance. North America are provided with the corre- The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

Z 298 All about wheels and tires

You should pay special attention to road condi- Tire labeling tions when temperatures are around freezing point. Overview Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 286). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 287).

Temperature

G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (Y page 301) in combination, can cause excessive heat ; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi- build-up and possible tire failure. cation Number (Y page 301) = Y The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, Maximum load rating ( page 300) and C, representing the tire's resistance to the ? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 291) generation of heat and its ability to dissipate A Manufacturer heat when tested under controlled conditions B Tire material (Y page 301) on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus- C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity tained high temperature can cause the material and speed rating (Y page 298) of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and D Load index (Y page 300) excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire E failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of Tire name performance which all passenger car tires must The markings described above are on the tire in meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety addition to the tire name (sales designation) and Wheels and tires Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent the manufacturer's name. higher levels of performance on the laboratory i test wheel than the minimum required by law. Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating

G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the All about wheels and tires 299

tire load rating and speed rating required for flange. The rim diameter is specified in your vehicle. inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 294). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 300). : Tire width For further information on the load bearing ; Nominal aspect ratio in % index, see "Load index" (Y page 300). = Tire code Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the ? Rim diameter approved maximum speed of the tire. A Load bearing index i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate B Speed rating from the data in the example. General: depending on the manufacturer's Regardless of the speed rating, always observe standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your not contain any letters or may contain one letter driving style to the traffic conditions. that precedes the size description. Summer tires If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger Index Speed rating vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) If "P" precedes the size description: these are R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) If "LT" precedes the size description: these are T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) If "T" precedes the size description: compact Wheels and tires emergency wheels with high tire pressure that V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) are only designed for temporary use in an emer- W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) gency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) width in millimeters. ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag- ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim RIf a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed Z 300 All about wheels and tires

rating in the service specification. Example: Further information about reading tire data can 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is be obtained from any qualified specialist work- the service specification. The letter "Y" rep- shop. resents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph Load index (300 km/h). If the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load index : may be imprinted after the letters that Index Speed rating identify speed index B on the sidewall of the tire (Y page 298). Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire R V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Light Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends i on the maximum load that the tire can carry at Not all tires with the M+S marking provide a certain pressure the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate have the i snowflake symbol on the tire from the data in the example. wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa- Maximum load rating tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of

Wheels and tires Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 307). Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible 1 Or M+S i for winter tires. All about wheels and tires 301 load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on is marked "2614" was manufactured in week 26 the driver's side (Y page 294). in 2014. i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate cific and may deviate from the values in the from the data in the example. illustration. Tire characteristics DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate The TIN is a unique identification number. The from the data in the example. TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety- Definition of terms for tires and loading relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. Tire ply composition and material used The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and Describes the number of plies or the number of manufacturing date A. layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, DOT (Department of Transportation): tire polyester and other materials. symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans- Bar

portation. Wheels and tires Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds Manufacturer identification code: manufac- per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) turer identification code ; provides details on are the equivalent of 1 bar. the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code DOT (Department of Transportation) with four symbols. DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the For further information about retreaded tires, U S Department of Transportation. see (Y page 307). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Normal occupant weight Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by The number of occupants for which the vehicle the manufacturer as a code to describe specific is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). characteristics of the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires first and second positions represent the week of with regards to tread quality, tire traction and manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal- temperature characteristics. The quality grad- endar week. Positions three and four represent ing assessment is made by the manufacturer

Z 302 All about wheels and tires

following specifications from the U.S. govern- fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is the tire. specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the Maximum loaded vehicle weight tires mounted at the factory. The maximum weight is the sum of: The Tire and Loading Information placard con- Rthe curb weight of the vehicle tains the recommended tire pressures for cold Rthe weight of the accessories tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi- R mum permissible vehicle speed. the load limit R The tire pressure table contains the recommen- the weight of the factory installed optional ded pressures for cold tires for various operat- equipment ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con- Kilopascal (kPa) ditions. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- Increased vehicle weight due to optional sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is equipment bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, Load index regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Rim the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. Curb weight GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys- rating. The actual load on an axle must never tem and optional equipment if these are instal- exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross led in the vehicle, but does not include passen- axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle gers or luggage. identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum load rating Speed rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is The speed rating is part of the tire identification. Wheels and tires approved. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of Maximum load on one tire the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi- two. cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi- PSI (pounds per square inch) cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Aspect ratio The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross Relationship between tire height and tire width weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the in percent. vehicle including all accessories, occupants, Changing a wheel 303 tire pressure Traction Pressure inside the tire applying an outward Traction is the result of friction between the tires force to every square inch of the tire's surface. and the road surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. Treadwear indicators The tire pressure should only be corrected when Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib- the tires are cold. uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) Cold tire pressure has been reached. The tires are cold: Occupant distribution Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their and designated seating positions. Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than Total load limit 1 mile (1.6 km) Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg Tread (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead Changing a wheel The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the Flat tire bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from The "Breakdown assistance" section the wheel rim. (Y page 270)contains information and notes on Sidewall how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat The part of the tire between the tread and the tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires bead. with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 270). Weight of optional extras Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in the event of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel is The combined weight of those optional extras mounted as described under "Mounting a that weigh more than the replaced standard wheel" (Y page 304). parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per- Rotating the wheels formance battery, are not included in the curb Wheels and tires weight and the weight of the accessories. G WARNING TIN (Tire Identification Number) Interchanging the front and rear wheels may This is a unique identifier which can be used by severely impair the driving characteristics if a tire manufacture r to identify tires, for example the wheels or tires have different dimensions. for a product recall, and thus identify the pur- The wheel brakes or suspension components chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur- may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci- er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. dent. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Load bearing index and tires are of the same dimensions. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capa- ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure city of a tire. monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel.

Z 304 Changing a wheel

Tire-mounting tools should not be used near Mounting a wheel the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Preparing the vehicle Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- X cialist workshop. Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. Always observe the instructions and safety X Apply the parking brake. notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section X (Y page 304). Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. The wear patterns on the front and rear tires X differ, depending on the operating conditions. Shift the transmission to position P. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern X Switch off the engine. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO: the center. X Open the driver's door. On vehicles that have the same size front and The on-board electronics now have status 0. rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord- This is the same as the SmartKey having been ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's removed. warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni- warranty book is available, the tires should be Y rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to tion lock ( page 128). 10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove be required earlier. Do not change the direction the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle of wheel rotation. (Y page 270). Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and reactivate the Securing the vehicle to prevent it from Y tire pressure monitor if necessary ( page 293). rolling away

Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation.

Wheels and tires An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheels If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, Y dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires ( page 270). from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. X Fold both plates upwards :. X Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. Changing a wheel 305

RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. X Place chocks or other suitable items under RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid the front and rear of the wheel that is diago- when the vehicle is raised. nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Raising the vehicle

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. X ! Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the The jack is designed exclusively for jacking wheel you wish to change by about one full up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other- turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. wise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the Wheels and tires jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll- The jacking points are located just behind the ing away by applying the parking brake and front wheel housings and just in front of the rear inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the wheel housings (arrows). parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and vehicle body, the vehicle has covers next to the non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, jacking points on the outer sills. flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Z 306 Changing a wheel

Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in.

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel X Position jack ? at jacking point =. G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of

Wheels and tires damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. G WARNING X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts completely on jacking point =. The base of when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip the jack must lie evenly on the ground. over. There is a risk of injury. X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 303). Wheel and tire combinations 307

Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur- X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted faces. wheel and adjust it if necessary. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align- Observe the recommended tire pressure ment bolt and push it on. (Y page 288). X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- All wheels mounted must be equipped with func- tight. tioning sensors. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight. Wheel and tire combinations

Lowering the vehicle You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized G WARNING Mercedes-Benz Center.

The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Wheels and tires and bolts are not tightened to the specified mends that you only use tires and wheels tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. Have the tightening torque immediately These tires have been specially adapted for checked at a qualified specialist workshop use with the control systems, such as ABS or after a wheel is changed. ESP®, and are marked as follows: X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original until the vehicle is once again standing firmly RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended on the ground. (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) X Place the jack to one side. RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z 308 Emergency spare wheel

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain a qualified specialist workshop. characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when Emergency spare wheel driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact Important safety notes with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehi- G WARNING cle. The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam- the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and and the wheel to be replaced may differ. approved. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may Information on tires, wheels and approved severely impair the driving characteristics. combinations can be obtained from any quali- There is a risk of an accident. fied specialist workshop. To avoid hazardous situations: ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- Radapt your driving style accordingly and ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ- drive carefully. ous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded emergency spare wheel that differs in size. tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare you have no information about their previous wheel of a different size briefly. usage. Rdo not switch ESP® off. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard wheel of a different size replaced at the on the B-pillar on the driver's side nearest qualified specialist workshop. Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions Observe the notes on recommended tire pres- as well as the tire type must be correct. sures under various operating conditions (Y page 288). When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not exceed Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance

Wheels and tires recommendations of the tire manufacturer in Snow chains must not be mounted on emer- the vehicle document wallet. gency spare wheels. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: General notes Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) You can ask for information regarding permitted Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer emergency spare wheels at an authorized tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Mercedes-Benz Center. Exception: it is permissible to install a differ- You should regularly check the pressure of the ent type or make in the event of a flat tire. emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with long trips, and correct the pressure as neces- run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 270). sary (Y page 288). The value on the wheel is Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are valid. not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It An emergency spare wheel may also be moun- is therefore recommended that you additionally ted against the direction of rotation. Observe equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount the time restriction on use as well as the speed tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. Emergency spare wheel 309 limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. i When you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the system may continue to show the tire pressure of the wheel that has been removed for a few minutes. The value displayed for the mounted emergency spare wheel is not the same as the current tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ; Vehicle tool kit tray = Stowage well Wheels and tires The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can be found in the stowage well under the trunk floor. X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 243). X Remove vehicle tool kit tray ;. X Turn stowage well = counter-clockwise and remove it. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel :. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 304).

Z 310 Vehicle electronics

Information regarding technical data In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: i The data stated here specifically refers to a Ronly approved wavebands may be used. vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an Rcompliance with the maximum permissible authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the output in these wavebands is required. data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation Vehicle electronics may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into Installing two-way radios and mobile account current scientific discussions relating phones (RF transmitters) to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. G WARNING The following antenna positions may be used if The electromagnetic radiation from modified RF transmitters have been properly installed: or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Approved antenna positions : Rear fender Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with i an exterior antenna On the rear fenders, it is recommended to R position the antenna on the side of the vehicle the exterior antenna has been installed closest to the center of the road. incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 This can compromise the operational safety when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket Have the low-reflection exterior antenna radio frequency transmitting equipment). mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings. Technical data When operating RF transmitters in the vehi- If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna cle, always connect them with the low-reflec- connections intended for use with the basic wir- tion exterior antenna. ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi- ! tional instructions when installing. The operating permit may be invalidated if Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi- the instructions for installation and use of RF mum transmission outputs or antenna positions transmitters are not observed. must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table: Identification plates 311

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the Identification plates base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 30 W 3 - 54 MHz 4 m waveband 15 W 74 - 88 MHz 2 m waveband 25 W 144 - 174 MHz Trunked radio/Tetra 10 W 380 - 460 MHz X Open the left door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. 70 cm waveband 15 W 400 - 460 MHz Mobile communications 10 W (3G/3G/4G)

The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) = Vehicle model There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R

70 cm waveband Technical data R2G/3G/4G

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Z 312 Service products and filling capacities

from the data shown here. You can find the Service products and filling capaci- data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle ties identification plate. Important safety notes Vehicle identification number (VIN) G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost mentally responsible manner. position. X Slightly raise front floor covering = and fold Service products include the following: floor covering flap : upwards. RFuels You will see VIN ;. RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant R Engine number Brake fluid RWindshield washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- Technical data Benz Center or on the Internet at : Emission control information plate, includ- http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. ing the certification of both federal and Cali- You can recognize service products approved by fornian emissions standards Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on ; Engine number (stamped into the crank- the containers: case) R = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Service products and filling capacities 313

Other identifications, for example: Model Of which R0 W-30 reserve R5 W-30 All models Approx. R 5 W-40 2.1 US gal (8.0 l)

Fuel Gasoline Important safety notes Fuel grade G WARNING ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. sion. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could You must avoid fire, open flames, creating result in damage to the fuel system and the sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained refueling. completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade G WARNING gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. There is a risk of injury. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can You must make sure that fuel does not come refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine vapors. Keep fuel away from children. failure. If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Do not use the following: observe the following: RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol) RWash away fuel from skin immediately RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) using soap and water. RE100 (100% ethanol) RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) immediately rinse them thoroughly with RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) clean water. Seek medical assistance with- RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) out delay. RM100 (100% methanol)

RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- RGasoline with metalliferous additives Technical data tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- RDiesel ing. Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom- RImmediately change out of clothing which mended for your vehicle. has come into contact with fuel. ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade Tank capacity unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable Model Total capa- and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline city of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: All models 17.4 US gal ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular (66.0 l) unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-

Z 314 Service products and filling capacities

mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as If you or others come into contact with fuel, possible. observe the following: RDo not drive at the maximum speed. R RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine Wash away fuel from skin immediately speeds over 3,000 rpm. using soap and water. R You will usually find information about the fuel If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label immediately rinse them thoroughly with on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. clean water. Seek medical assistance with- i For further information, consult a qualified out delay. specialist workshop or visit RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- As a temporary measure, if the recommended ing. fuel is not available, you may also use regular RImmediately change out of clothing which unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of has come into contact with fuel. 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. following fuel types: Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. R Information on refueling (Y page 142). premium-grade unleaded gasoline RE85 fuel Additives Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade i In some countries, the available gasoline unleaded gasoline may not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This fuel i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by can temporarily produce unpleasant odors, the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of especially on short journeys. As soon as sul- the fuel filler flap. fur-free fuel (sulfur content <10 ppm) is used for refueling, the odors are reduced. Fuel consumption The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that Flexible Fuel vehicles of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when operating Important safety notes the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than G WARNING with premium-grade gasoline. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel Maintenance incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center sion. that you are operating or have operated the You must avoid fire, open flames, creating vehicle with E85 fuel.

Technical data sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Low outside temperatures and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †), refueling. the starting procedure can take noticeably longer when operating with E85 fuel. G WARNING E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside tem- Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. peratures under -4 ‡ (-20 †). There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Service products and filling capacities 315

Engine oil Filling capacities General notes The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Capacity E 400 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) E 550 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine.

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec- Brake fluid ification other than is necessary to fulfill the G prescribed service intervals. Do not change WARNING the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture longer replacement intervals than those pre- from the air. This lowers the boiling point of scribed. You could otherwise cause engine the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, hard. This would impair braking efficiency. you may damage the engine and the exhaust There is a risk of an accident. gas aftertreatment. You should have the brake fluid renewed at When handling engine oil, observe the important the specified intervals. safety notes on service products (Y page 312). The engine oils are matched to the performance Comply with the important safety notes for ser- of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. vice products when handling brake fluid You should therefore only use engine oils and oil (Y page 312). filters that are approved for vehicles with main- The brake fluid change intervals can be found in tenance systems. the Maintenance Booklet. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB- Or visit the website Approval 331.0. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Information about approved brake fluid can be The table shows which engine oils have been obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or Technical data approved for your vehicle. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Model MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replace- All models 229.5 ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers.

Z 316 Service products and filling capacities

Coolant The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system Important safety notes should: R G be at least 50%. This will protect the engine WARNING cooling system against freezing down to If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). ponents in the engine compartment, it may Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Let the engine cool down before you add anti- Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the with MB Specifications for Service Products antifreeze from components before starting 310.1. the engine. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate ! Only add coolant that has been premixed antifreeze and corrosion protection. with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. i The coolant is checked with every mainte- Further information on coolants can be found nance interval at a qualified specialist work- in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser- shop. vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Filling capacities Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even Model Capacity in countries where high temperatures prevail. E 550 Approx. 11.5 US qt Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not (10.9 l) sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. All other models Approx. 10.9 US qt (10.3 l) i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Windshield washer system Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant Important safety notes (Y page 312). The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- G WARNING freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol- Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if lowing tasks: it comes into contact with hot engine compo- Technical data R corrosion protection nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of R antifreeze protection fire and injury. Rraising the boiling point Make sure that no windshield washer con- If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ ! (130 †). Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water, otherwise, the level sensor may give a false reading. Vehicle data 317

When handling washer fluid, observe the impor- Refrigerant instruction label tant safety notes on service products (Y page 312). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- ; merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all Refrigerant filling capacity year round. = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Climate control system refrigerant Warning symbol : advises you about: Important safety notes Rpossible dangers Rhaving service work carried out at a qualified The climate control system of your vehicle is fil- specialist workshop led with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant Filling capacities type used can be found on the radiator cross member. All models Capacity ! ‑ Only the refrigerant R 134a and the PAG oil Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with (590 ± 10 g) any other PAG oil that is not approved for PAG oil 4.2 ± 0.4 oz R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate (120 ± 10 g) control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable Vehicle data regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard General notes Technical data J639 included. Always have work on the climate control system Please note that for the specified vehicle data: carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload.

Z 318 Vehicle data

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height E 400 60.7 in (1541 mm) E 550 60.6 in (1538 mm)

All models Vehicle width 79.4 in (2016 mm) including exterior mirrors Vehicle height 55.0 in (1398 mm) Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm) Vehicle height, 80.5 in (2045 mm) when opening/closing the roof Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg) load

Model Vehicle length Technical data E 550 186.9 in (4746 mm) All other models 185.2 in (4703 mm)

Model Turning radius E 400 36.6 ft (11.15 m) E 550 36.7 ft (11.19 m) 319 320